Download Vauxhall 2007 Vectra Owner`s manual
Transcript
VAUXHALL Vectra Owner’s Manual Data specific to your ve hicle Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible. This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate. Fuel Desi gnation Engine oil Grad e Viscosity Tyre inflation pressure Tyre si ze wi th up to 3 persons Front R ear Front R ea r Winter tyres Front R ear Front R ea r Weights Permissible gross vehicle weig ht – EC k erb weight = Loading Lev el control Bump er H eig ht 0 wi th full load Sum mer tyres see page 179 Your Ve ctra Dev eloped to the la test findings of vehic le research, it offers technical sophistication and exceptiona l comfort. Your vehicle represents an ideal synthesis of ad vanced technolog y, outsta nding safety, environm ental compatibility and economy in opera tion. It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and to see it performs perfectly. This O wner's Manual provides you with all the necessary information to tha t end. The O wner's Manual should a lways be kept in the v ehicle: ready to hand in the g lov e com partment. Make use of the Owne r's Manual: z z z z z Its “I n brief” section will giv e y ou an initial ov erview. Its index will help you find what y ou want. It will familiarize you with the sophisticated technology. It will increase your pleasure in y our vehicle. It will help you to handle y our v ehicle ex pertly. The O wner's Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood. This symb ol: 6 signifies: continue reading on next page. 3 The asterisk sig nifies equipment op tions not in all vehicles (model variants, engine options, models specific to one country, op tional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories). Text highlighted in yellow in p artic ular indica tes possible risk of accident and injury. Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may b e fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed accordingly. Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or ind icate some action to be performed. Black arrow s in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second ac tion to be perform ed. We w ish you m any hours of pleasurable driving Your Va uxhall team 1 2 Contents Comm itment to custom er satisfaction: Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers offer first class service at competitive prices. Experienced, factory-trained technicians w ork according to factory instructions.Your Authorised Repairer can supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALLAPPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone stringent quality and precision chec ks, and of course useful and a ttrac tiv e VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES. Our nam e i s your guara ntee! For d eta ils of the Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork please r ing this number; 01582 - 427200 In b rief .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 4 Instrum ents ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 33 K eys, doors, b onnet .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 54 S eats, Interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 69 S afety system s .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 94 Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 116 Windows, sun roof . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 120 C lim ate c ontrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 126 Automatic transm ission . .... ..... .... ..... .... 144 C VTronic ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 150 Driving hints .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 158 S ave fuel, protec t the env ironment .... 160 Fuel consum ption, fuel, refuelling ... .... 162 C atalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 164 Drive control system s ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 168 Brakes ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 180 Wheels, tyres . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 184 Roof racks, caravan and tra iler towing . .... ..... .... 188 S elf-help .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 199 If y ou ha ve a problem .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 232 Maintenance, Inspec tion system .... .... 234 Vehicle care .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 245 Technical data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 250 Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 282 3 In brief Key num be rs, Code numbers Remove key number from keys. The key number is specified in the vehic le docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3. Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: m ake a note of the key identifier cod es. Elec tronic imm obiliser, Radio 3 : the cod e numb ers are specified in the Car Pass and Radio Pass 3 respec tiv ely. Do not keep the Car Pass and Ra dio Pass in the vehicle. 6 Further information – see p ages 54, 55, vehicle recomm issioning – see page 244. 4 Unlock vehicle : P ress button q or turn ke y in driver’s side door lock, pull door handle O nce Twice = = Driv er’s door is unlock ed. Entire v ehicle is unlocked. The luggage compartment is autom atically reloc ked after 5 minutes. 6 Door lock s, child sa fety lock – see page 54, electronic immobiliser – see page 55, radio frequency remote control – see page 56, central loc king sy stem – see page 58, anti-theft locking system 3 – see p age 58, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 63. Unlock luggage compartme nt: Press button r on rem ote control or button x in the driver or passenger door The lug gage compartment is unlocked and can be opened within 5 minutes. Front se at adjustment: Pull handle, slide seat, release handle, allow se at to audibly latch into pos ition If the luggage compartment is not opened within 5 m inutes, it is automatically loc ked again. Nev er adjust the seat while driving. It could move in a n uncontrolled manner when the ha ndle is pulled. The lugga ge c om partment is automatically locked 5 minutes after closing. 6 Seat position – see page 69, electrica lly adjusta ble front seats – see p age 79. 6 Radio frequency rem ote control – see page 56, central lock ing – see page 58, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 63. Adjust front seat backrests: Turn handwheel Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position. Do not lea n on seat back rest whilst adjusting it. 6 Seat position – see p age 69, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 79. Im porta nt : Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25c m) from the steering wheel, to permit safe airbag dep loy ment. 5 Adjusting front se at lum bar support: Adjust leve r Adjust lumb ar support to suit personal req uirements. Do not lean on sea t backrest whilst adjusting it. 6 Seat position – see pag e 69, electrically a djustable front sea ts – see page 79. 6 Adjusting front seat height 3: Operate lever on outboard side of seat Adjusting front s eat inclination 3: Ope rate front lever on outboard side of s eat Pump direction of the lever Up: Raises seat Dow n: Lowers seat Pump d irection of the lever Up: Inclines seat Down: Lev els seat 6 Seat position – see page 69, electrica lly adjusta ble front seats – see p age 79. 6 Seat position – see p age 69, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 79. Ele ctric seat adjustm ent 3 : Switch on outboard side of s eat Front: – Longitudina l adjustment, – Height adjustment, – Angle adjustm ent. Middle: – Backrest adjustment. Adjusting head re straint height of front and re ar outboard seats: Pre ss button to release and adjust he ight, engage in position 6 Head restraint position – see page 70, rear head restraints – see page 70. Adjusting head restraint angle of front and rear outboard se ats 3: Swive l bottom edge of head restraint forward or rearward 6 Head restraint position – see pa ge 70, rear head restra ints – see p age 70. Rear 3: – Lumbar support. 6 Seat position – see pag e 69, electrically a djustable front sea ts – see page 79. 7 Adjusting interior m irror: Swivel mirror hous ing Adjusting exterior m irrors: Four-way switch on driver’s door Swing in e xterior mirror: Swiv el lev er on underside of mirror housing to red uce daz zle a t nig ht. Press switch for left or right hand mirror: four-way switch operates the corresp onding m irror. Electric 3 (both mirror switches must not b e latched into position): Autom atic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3: Dazzle at night is automa tic ally red uced – see page 114. 6 Position m emory 3 – see page 80. Vehicles with electric seat ad justment 3: if the mirror switch for the passenger side is depressed when reverse gear is engaged , the passenger side ex terior mirror repositions itself towards the rear tyres in order to serve as mirror parking assistance (not when tow ing a carav an / trailer). Automatic anti-da zzle exterior mirror on the driver’s side 3: dazzle at night is autom atic ally reduc ed – see page 114. 6 Further information, aspherical exterior mirror 3 – see pa ge 114, heated ex terior mirrors – see page 20, electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 79. 8 Manually: press lightly . Push four-way switch to the right: ex terior mirrors swiv el in. Push four-way switch to the left: exterior mirrors swiv el out. The mirrors can a lso be swivelled in from the outside: press button p on remote control or turn key toward rear of v ehicle in driver’s door lock and hold. S wivelling only a llowed at speeds of up to 4 mph (7 km /h). Fitting seat belt: Draw se at be lt smoothly from inertia ree l, guide over shoulder and engage in buckle The b elt must not be twisted at any point. The lap belt must lie snugly against the body. The backrest must not be tilted bac k too far (recomm ended tilting angle approx. 25°). To release belt, press red button on belt buckle. 6 Seat belts – see pa ges 95 to 99, airbag sy stems 3 – see p age 100, seat p osition – see page 69. Disengaging steering column lock: To re lease the lock, move the s te ering wheel slightly and turn the key to position I Positions: 0 = Ignition off I = Steering free, ignition off II = Ignition on, with diesel engine: pre-heat III = Start Steering whee l adjustment 3: Move lever down, adjust he ight and distance, move lever up, engage Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is stationary and steering colum n loc k is released. 6 Airb ag systems 3 – see page 100. 6 Starting – see page 23, electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 55, remove key and loc k steering w heel – see p age 24. 9 10 1 Page Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 129 2 Front pa ssenger airbag .... .... ..... ... 100 3 Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 129 4 Radio 3 or Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... . 52 5 Central information display for date, time, outside temperature, Infotainm ent system 3, radio 3 , check control 3, trip computer 3, electronic air conditioning system 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 41 6 Turn signals, hea dlight fla sh, dipped and main beam ... .... ..... 16, 17 Door-to-door lighting 3 and parking lights .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 17 Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 172 7 Remote control 3 for radio a nd Infotainm ent system ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 30 8 Instruments .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 33 9 Horn .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 18 10 11 Pa ge Windscreen wiper and wa sh system, headlight wash system 3 and rear window wash system 3 .. ..... .... 19 Display op eration 3 . ..... ..... ..... ..... .... 48 Exterior lig hting ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 117 Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 Front fog lights 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 Head lig ht range adjustment 3 ..... 117 Page 19 Heated seat (right) 3 . ..... .... ..... .... . 130 Anti-theft alarm system 3 .. ..... .... .. 63 Rear window blind 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... 125 Traction Control sy stem 3 .. ..... .... 168 Electronic Stability Program me 3 170 20 Ashtray s ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 90 21 Telematics 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 52 22 C igarette lighter 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 89 23 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning sy stem 3 ... ..... .... 126 Electronic air conditioning system 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 126 Auxiliary heating 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... 140 12 Stowage compartment 13 Bonnet release lev er .... .... ..... .... ..... . 68 14 Ignition lock with steering wheel lock .. ..... .... ..... ... 9 15 Ac celera tor pedal .... .... .... ..... .... .... 158 16 Brake peda l ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 159, 180 17 Steering wheel position adjuster .. ... 9 24 Heated seat (left) 3 and seat climate control .... ..... .... ..... .... 130 Haz ard warning lights .... .... ..... .... .. 18 Parking distance sensors 3 . ..... .... 174 18 Clutch ped al 3 .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 159 25 Glove compartment 26 Fusebox . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 212 11 11 Control indicators O Turn sig na l light s: see p ages 17, 33. I Oil p ressure: see p age 33. R Brake system, clutch system: see p ages 34, 181. p Alternator: see p age 34. v Airbag systems, bel t tensioners: see p ages 96, 105. W Coolant t em perature: see p ages 34, 40. X Sea t belt 3: see p age 35. 12 T Autom atic t ransmission 3, CVTronic 3, wi nter program me: see pages 147, 155. y Seat occup ancy recog nition 3: see page 105. m Cruise control 3 : see page 172. ! Glow plugs 3: see page 35. Y u Anti- lock Bra ke Syst em : see page 183. Fuel level: see pages 36, 40, 199. Z v Exhaust emission 3: see pages 36, 166. Tract ion Control system 3, Elec tronic St abili ty Progr amme 3 : see pages 168, 170. B > Adapt ive Forward Lig hting (AFL) 3: see pages 28, 118. Front fog li ghts 3: see pages 35, 116. g r Fog tai l light: see pages 35, 116. Trailer turn signa l 3: see page 36. P Mai n beam: see pages 16, 35. Display in tachometer The following control ind ic ators will illuminate as necessa ry : o Imm obiliser: see p ages 37, 55, 166. p Electro-hydrauli c power assisted steering : see p age 37. q r Hea dlight range adjustm ent 3: see p age 117. F Brak e pad w ea r indica tor 3: see pages 38, 180. > Front fog lights 3 : see page 116. S Engine oil level: see pages 38, 236. r Fog tail l ight: see page 116. H Cool ant fluid lev el: see pages 38, 239. P Main beam : see page 16. v Serv ice interval display: see page 234. O Tur n sig nal lig hts: see page 17. x Tyr e p ressure control system 3, loss of pressure w arning from the respectiv e t yre: see pages 38, 176. k Instrument il luminati on: see page 117. ? Hea dlight range adj ust ment 3: see page 117. b Courtesy li ght: see page 118. c Courtesy li ght deact ivat ion 3: see page 118. a Reading li ghts, front 3 : see page 118. ¨ Hazard w arning lig hts: see page 18. Pa rking d istance sensors 3: see p age 174. A Engine electronics, transmission elec tronics 3: see p ages 37, 55, 166. w Tyr e p ressure control system 3, fault : see pages 38, 176. s Open lugga ge compa rtment: see p ages 37, 61. y v Airbag systems, bel t tensioners: see p ages 96, 105. Doors open 3, indi cating the r especti ve door: see page 38. t Bul b replacem ent 3: see p ages 38, 218. Lighting Light swi tch, stal k positi ons: see pages 16, 116, 7 8 9 Lights off Park ing lig ht s Dipp ed and ma in beam 13 Climate control x Air flow: see p age 127. Air distri bution: see p age 127, L to head area ab ov e ad justable air vents and to footwell, M to head area ab ov e adjustable air vents front and rear 3, l to wind screen, J to wind screen and to footwell, K to footwell. V Demi st ing and d efrosti ng 3: see p ages 133, 137. Ü Hea ted rear wind ow: see p age 128. 14 n 4 Air conditioning system 3: see page 128. d Sun roof: closing – see page 123. ü Sun roof: opening – see p age 123. see page 135. f Heated seats 3: see page 130. Sun roof: comfort setting – see page 123. e Sun roof: raising – see page 123. Air reci rculati on system 3: see page 128. AUTOAutom atic m ode 3: ß Sun roof 3 A Driv er’ s seat with clim ate control 3: see page 130. b Remote cont rol of auxiliary heating / v ent ilation 3: see page 140. Windscreen wiper Stal k positi ons: see page 19, § $ Off, % & Slow, Timed interv al wi pe, or automa tic wipe w ith rain sensor 3, Fast. Date, time, information display, radio ) Ciga ret te lighter 3 : see page 89. j Horn: see page 18. / Bonnet: see page 68. T Wi nter program me, automa tic tr ansm issi on 3, CVTronic 3: see pages 147, 155. j Selector lever lock ing, automa tic tr ansm issi on 3, CVTronic 3: see pages 144, 151. Chi ld safety sw itch 3 : see page 121. + Fir st - aid k it 3: see page 204. N Rear w indow b lind 3: see page 125. ¨ Wa rning tri angle 3: see page 204. r Park ing dista nce sensors 3: see page 174. Miscellaneous Informat ion displa y: see p age 41. p Centra l lock ing system: locking – see page 58. On button for date and time, q Centra l lock ing system: unloc king – see pag e 58. But tons on wiper stal k 3: see p age 42. r Boot li d / tail gate: unloc king – see pag e 61. i Trip computer, forwards menu search, x h Trip computer, backwards menu search, Luggag e c om part ment: unloc king – see pag e 61. m § Trip computer, select Centra l lock ing switc h: see page 59. Ä Anti- theft alarm system 3 : see page 63. z Ö ; Setting buttons for d ate and tim e. Rem ote control 3 for radio and Infota inment system: see p age 30. Cruis e control 3 But tons on turn signal sta lk: see p age 172. m On, Accelerate, g Decelerate, § Off. 15 Light switch: 7 = Off 8 = Parking lights 9 = Dipped or m ain beam Press r = Fog tail light Press > = Front fog lig hts 3 6 Other notes – see page 116, head lig ht warning device – see page 24, head lig ht ra nge adjustment 3 – see page 117, instrument illumination 3 – see page 117, day tim e d riv ing lights 3 – see page 116. 16 Main and dipped be am switch: Main be am = P us h s talk forward Dippe d beam = P us h s talk forward again You can also switch from main beam to dipped bea m by pulling the stalk towards the steering wheel. Headlight flash: P ull stalk towards s tee ring wheel Operating door-to-door lighting 1) 3: Key to position 0 and rem ove, ope n driver’s door, pull turn signal s talk towards steering whe el Dipped beam and the reversing lights light up for an add itional 30 seconds after the driver’s door is c losed . If the driv er’s door is left open, the lights will go out after tw o minutes. Door-to-door lighting can be deactivated by inserting the k ey in the ignition sw itch or by p ulling the turn signal stalk towards the steering wheel aga in while the driv er’s door is open. 1) Operating turn signal lights : Right = Stalk all the way up Left = Stalk all the way down The turn signal stalk returns to its orig inal position after use. When the steering wheel is straightened up, the turn signal lights are autom atic ally cancelled. Switch the turn signal off manually by tapping the stalk. When chang ing lanes, tap stalk until resistance is felt: the resp ective turn signal will flash three times. Ope rating parking lights : Light switch to position 0, ignition key to position 0, move turn signal stalk fully upwards or downwards As a check, a warning buzzer sounds and the turn signal control indica tor on the respective side illuminates. To switch it off, switch on the ignition or mov e the turn signal stalk in the op posite direction. Hold the stalk if y ou want the turn sig nals to fla sh longer. "D oor-to-do or" light function. 17 Cruis e control operation: Press button on stalk Switch on: ta p button m. Switch off: tap button §. Resume at stored speed: tap button g. 6 Cruise control 3 – see pa ge 172. 18 Hazard warning lights : On = Press ¨ Off = Press ¨ again To aid location of the pushb utton, the red surface is illuminated when the ignition is switched on. When the button is pressed, its control indicator flashes in time with the ha zard warning lights. Sounding the horn: P ress the ce ntre of the steering w hee l 6 Airb ag systems 3 – page 100, remote control for radio and Infotainment system 3 – page 30. Winds creen wipe r: Gently tap s talk upward § = Off $ = Adjustable timed interval wipe % = Slow & = Fast Stalk always mov es back to starting position. Shift to next gear up or down: just tap stalk g ently. Push stalk pa st resistance point a nd hold: windscreen wiper stages are selected . Adjustable interva l wipe $: Shorter interv als = Turn adjuster wheel to right Longer intervals = Turn ad juster wheel to left Press the stalk down from p osition §: Single sw ipe. 6 Further inform ation – see pages 240, 241, 246. Automatic wiping w ith rain sensor 3 : Ge ntly tap stalk upward § = O ff $ = Automatic wiping w ith rain sensor % = Slow (constant) & = F as t (constant) Automatic wiping $ : The rain sensor detects the amount of water on the wind screen and automa tica lly reg ulates the windscreen wiper. The sensitivity of the sy stem can be adjusted using the adjuster wheel: Less sensitiv e = To the left More sensitiv e = To the rig ht If necessary, the positions % or & ca n b e selected manually. To switch off, m ov e stalk d ow nwa rd s. Ope rating w indscreen and headlight wash systems 3: P ull stalk towards s tee ring wheel The wiper w ill swipe for a few strok es. At low speeds, there is a one-time post-wash swipe. The headlight wash system 3 is ready for operation when the lights are switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the headlights (twice). Subsequently the headlight wash system is b lock ed for 2 minutes. The headlight wash system is deactivated if wash fluid is low. O n vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep the sensor area clean. 6 Further information – see pages 241, 242, 246. 6 Further information – see p ages 240, 241, 246. 19 Rear window wiper 3 and wash system 3 Operation: Wiper on = P ush stalk forward Wiper off = P ush stalk forward again Wash = P res s and hold The rear window wiper swipes in timed interval mode. When washing , the w iper swipes for a few strokes. At low speeds, there is a one-time post-w ash swipe. The rear window wa sh system is deactivated if wash fluid is low. 6 Further inform ation – see pages 241, 242, 246. 20 He ated rear window, heated ex terior mirrors: On = Press Ü Off = Press Ü again Heating operationa l only with engine running. The rea r window and exterior mirror heating is switched off a utomatica lly after approx. 15 minutes. 6 Further information – see p age 128. Clearing misted or icy windows: Set air dis tribution to l, turn rotary switches for temperature and fan clockw ise Air conditioning sys tem 3: P ush V and n buttons, turn rotary switch for temperature clockwis e O pen front air vents, direct side air vents towards the door windows. Close centre air vents 3. 6 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning 3 – see page 126, electronic air conditioning system 3 – see page 134. Setting e lectronic air conditioning system 3 to autom atic m ode: Press AUTO button, set tempe rature for driver and passenger sides us ing left and right knobs O pen all front a ir v ents. If desired , the rear vents also 3. 6 Elec tronic air c onditioning sy stem 3 – see page 134. Information display: Us ed to display information on: – – – – – – – – Time, outside temperature, radio 3 and date, navigation 3 , telephone 3 , chec k control 3, trip comp uter 3, electronic air conditioning 3. 6 Information disp la y 3 – see page 41. Manual transmission o = Neutral position 1 to 5 = 1s t to 5th ge ar 6 = 6th gear 3 When shifting up from 4th to 5th gea r: push the lever towa rd s the right at the beginning of the shift operation. Between 5th a nd 6th gear 3 : push gearshift lever to right in straight line. When shifting from 5th to 4th gear: do not exert any force towa rd s the left. R = Reverse ge ar Reverse gear: w ith v ehicle stationary , pull the ring up three seconds after de-clutching and engage gear. If the gear does not enga ge, set the lever in neutral, relea se the clutch pedal and depress again; then repeat g ear selection. 21 Autom atic transmission 3: P = Park position R = Reve rse gear N = Neutral D = Automatic gear sele ction Sele ctor lever in D to left: + = Upshift - = Downshift Always start in P or N. To leave position, opera te brak e pedal and press button on selector lever (selector lever lock ). To enga ge P or R, push button on selector lev er. P: R: O nly with vehicle stationary , first a pply handbrak e O nly with vehicle stationary 6 Automatic transmission – see p age 144. CVTronic 3 : P = Park pos ition R = Reverse ge ar N = Neutral D = Continuously variable automatic mode Se lector leve r in D to le ft: Continuously variable automatic mode + = Upshift - = Downshift Alw ays start in P or N. To leave position, op erate brake ped al and press button on selector lever (selector lever lock). To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. P: O nly with vehicle stationary, first apply ha ndb rake R: O nly with vehicle stationary 6 C VTronic – see pag e 150. 22 Exhaust gases are poisonous Exhaust g ases contain ca rbon monox ide, which is ex tremely poisonous but is odourless and colourless. Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and nev er run the engine in an enclosed space. Before starting off, check: z Ty re pressure and condition – see pag es 176, 184, 268. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine com partment – see pages 235 to 242. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and num ber p la tes are free from dirt, snow and ice and are operational. z No objects are in front of the rear wind ow, on the instrument panel or in the area in which the airbag s inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly ad justed. z Bra ke op eration. Starting, petrol engines : Manual trans miss ion idling with clutch pedal depres sed, operate foot brake, automatic trans miss ion or CVTronic in P or N, do not acce lerate, turn key to pos ition III The initially increased engine speed autom atic ally falls as the engine temperature rises. Before repea ting the starting proc edure, turn the key ba ck to 0 in the ignition sw itch, remove it and then reinsert it. Then repeat the starting proc edure. Starting, dies el engine: Manual transmission in neutral with clutch pedal depresse d, apply foot brake, automatic transmission in P or N, do not accelerate, turn ke y to position II; when control indicator ! goes out1), turn ke y to position III Before rep eating the starting procedure, turn the key back to 0 in the ignition switch, remove it and then reinsert it. Then repeat the starting procedure. 6 Electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 55, further inform ation – see pages 158, 199. 6 Electronic immobiliser – see page 55, further information – see pag es 158, 199. 1) Preh eatin g system sw itches on o nly if outside tem perature is low . 23 Advice when parking: z Alw ays apply hand brake firm ly. O n slopes apply the ha nd brake as firmly as possible. z With m anual transmission, select first gear or reverse, for automatic tra nsmission 3 or CVTronic 3, place selector lever in P. z Close windows and sun roof 3. z In vehicles with autom atic transmission 3 or CVTronic 3 the key can only be removed in selector lever p osition P. Rele as ing the handbrake: Raise leve r s lightly, pre ss lock button, lower le ver fully 6 Bra kes - see pag e 180 Parking the vehicle: Apply handbrake firm ly, engine off, rem ove ke y, lock s te ering wheel, lock ve hicle To lock , press button p or turn key anticlock wise in the lock. To activate the anti-theft lock ing sy stem 3 and anti-theft alarm system 3, press button p twice or turn key anti-clockw ise twice. 6 Further information – see p ages 55, 158, ra dio frequency rem ote control – see p age 56, central locking system – see page 58, Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – see pag e 63, vehicle dec om missioning – see page 244. z Turn steering wheel until y ou feel loc k engage (anti-theft protection). z Engine cooling fan m ay run on after the engine has been switched off. Warning buzze rs While driving: z If seat belt is not fa stened1 ), z If a specified ma ximum speed is ex ceeded1 ), z If the luggag e com partment is open when the vehicle starts off. When the vehicle is parked and the driv er’s door is opened: z If the k ey is inserted 3, z If ex terior lights a re on, z If the turn signa l stalk is engaged. 1) 24 Co untry-specific version. Ge nuine Vauxhall P arts and Accessories We rec om mend "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts relea sed expressly for your vehic le typ e. These parts have undergone special tests to establish their reliability, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall v ehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, w e cannot a ssess or guarantee these attrib utes for other prod ucts, even if they ha ve b een granted a pproval by the relev ant authorities or in some other form . Service work, mainte nance We recomm end tha t you entrust all w ork to a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer, who ca n provide you with relia ble serv ice and correctly perform all work according to factory instructions. 6 If you have a problem– see pa ge 232, service interval display – see pa ge 234. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories" and conversion p arts app rov ed by Vauxhall can be ob ta ined from a Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer, of course. Here y ou will be given comprehensiv e ad vice a bout permitted technical changes and c orrect installation w ill ta ke p la ce. That was the most important inform ation for your firs t drive in your V ectra. The othe r pages of this chapte r contain a sum mary of the other intere sting functions in your vehicle. The rem aining chapters of the Ow ner’s Manual contain important inform ation on operation, safety and maintenance as we ll as a complete index. For your s afety C arry out regularly the check s rec om mended in the indiv idual sections of this Owner’ s M anual. Ensure that your v ehicle is serviced at the service intervals spec ified in the Serv ic e Booklet. We recommend that y ou entrust this work to a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Hav e faults remedied without d elay! C onsult a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised R epairer. If necessary , interrupt your journey. 6 Maintenance – see page 234. 25 External w indow and sun roof 3 ope ration 3 Press button q or p on the remote control until the windows are open or closed, respectively . Press button p on the remote control until the sun roof is closed. If the rain sensor 3 detects w ater with the mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3 activated, a ll electronic w indows and the sun roof are closed. The windows and the sun roof are also automa tic ally closed after four hours. 6 Further inform ation – see pages 122, 124. Position m emory 3 for ele ctrically adjustable drive r’s seat, exterior mirrors and ins ide rear view mirror Storing setti ng s 1. Adjust seat and mirror, 2. Press m emory button M a nd the position button to be used (1, 2 or 3) simulta neously. Storage is ack nowledged by an acoustic signal. Ret rieving setting s Press and hold down position buttons 1, 2 or 3, until stored p ositions hav e been reached . Ad justments may only be performed with vehicle stationary. 6 Further information – see p age 69. 26 Heated se ats 3, driver’s s eat with climate control 3 O perate the a djuster wheels beneath the centre air vents and buttons on the rear of the centre console. For the front seats, set knurled wheels to required ventilation setting 3 or heater setting as per requirements. For rear outboard seats, p ress buttons. 6 Further information – see page 130. Travel As sistant 3 The Trav el Assistant contains: z z z z z z armrest, stowage compartm ents, waste container, drink holders, accessory sock ets, connection console e.g. for DVD p la yer 3, z elec tric cool box, z ta bles, z tw in aud io (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartm ent. Ta bles Fold arm rest upward (1). Set req uired clea ra nce by adjusting longitud inal p osition of tab le (4). Use recessed grip to p ull tab le upward as fa r a s it will go (1), sw iv el table forw ard (2) and fold downward (3). 6 Further information – see page 72. The Trav el Assistant is installed on a console above the m iddle seat in the rear. 27 FlexOrganize r 3 The side walls house a ttac hm ent rails that can be used a s necessary for different systems to divide the lugg age compartment or secure load s. The system consists of: z variable partition net z variable partition w all z partition rod z mesh pockets for the side walls z hooks 6 Further inform ation – see page 86. Adaptive F orward Lighting (AF L) 3 On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, improves illumination of z curves (curve lighting ), z intersections and tight turns (turn lighting). C ur ve lighti ng The Xenon light b eam pivots based on steering wheel position and speed (from app rox . 6 mph / 10 km/h). The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. Turn lig hting An additiona l light is switc hed on based on steering wheel position (when turned past app rox . 90°), turn signal use and speed (up to app rox . 25 mph / 40 k m/h). The lig ht shines at an a ngle from app rox . 90° to the left or right of the v ehicle up to a distance of a pprox. 30 metres. 6 Further information – see page 118. 28 Operating the graphical inform ation display 3 or the colour information dis play 3 Usi ng multi func tion butt on Push C onfirm / select Rota te Move in menu Using but tons on wiper stalk Rear button: § Activate / confirm / select 6 Further information – see p age 42. Front buttons: h Move up in the menu i Move down in the menu Trip computer 3 The trip computer shows vehicle data which it continua lly records and evaluates electronically. Functions: z Range, z Effective consum ption, z Average consum ption, z Instantaneous consumption, z Average speed, z Distance, z Settings. 6 Further information – see page 48. 29 Check control 3 Check control monitors several fluid levels, the tyre pressure 3 , the radio frequency remote control battery, the anti-theft alarm system 3 and imp ortant external lights, including the cables and fuses. In trailer mode the trailer lig hting is a lso monitored. 6 Further inform ation – see page 46. 30 Re mote control for radio and Infotainment system 3 Radio 3, radio telephone 3 and Infotainment sy stem 3 functions ca n be op erated with the b uttons on the steering wheel. For further inform ation, see the respectiv e op erating instructions. Twin Audio 3 Twin Audio provides rear seat oc cup ants the op portunity to listen to a different audio sourc e than the one selec ted b y the driver. Two headp hone connec tions a re available with sepa ra te volume control. For further information, see the respective radio operating instructions. Active he ad res traints 3 Vauxhall Full-Size airbag system In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the active head restraints automatically tilt forwards. The head is more effectiv ely sup ported by the head restraint and the danger of hyp erex tension in the neck area is reduced. The Vauxhall Full-Size airbag sy stem comprises severa l ind ividual systems. Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide bushes. Front a irbag system The front airbag sy stem will b e triggered in the event of a serious accident inv olv ing a frontal impa ct and forms sa fety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver a nd front passenger is check ed a nd the risk of injuries to the up per body and head thereby substantially reduced. Si de airba g system 3 The side airbag sy stem triggers when a side-on collision occurs and provides a safety barrier for the driver a nd/or passenger in the respective front door area. This reduces the risk of injury to the upper body considera bly in case of a side impa ct. C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3 The curtain a irba g system triggers in case of a side-on collision and provid es a safety barrier in the hea d area on the respective side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a side-on collision. 6 Further information – see page 100. 31 Parking distance se nsors 3 ECOService -Fle x The p arking dista nce sensors front and rea r sy stems are automatically sw itc hed on when d riv ing in reverse gear. The oil change and service intervals are flexible, based on a number of different parameters and the conditions under whic h the vehic le is used. Various enginespecific data is continuously recorded and used to calculate the rem aining distance up to the next inspection date. The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be switched on and off m anually using the r button on the instrument panel. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to the front or rea r, a series of signals is sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter a s the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is less than 30 cm , the signal will b e continuous. 6 Further inform ation – see page 174. 32 The rem aining driving dista nce can b e seen in the tachom eter disp la y when the ignition is off: press the reset b utton und er the trip odometer; v and the remaining driving dista nce will then be display ed. With the specially developed engine oil for vehicles with EC OS ervice-Flex, the nex t eng ine oil change is due after a maxim um of 2 years or 25,000 m iles / 35,000 k m (petrol engine) or after a max imum of 2 y ears or 30,000 miles / 50,000 km (diesel engine) When topping up the oil, alwa ys use grade GM-LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025 in order to ma intain the flexible maintenance interva ls. 6 Further information – see pages 234, 251. Instruments Control indicators The c ontrol indicators described here are not present in a ll v ehicles. The descrip tions howev er, a pply to all instrum ent versions. Some control ind icators are shown a s pictograms within the tachometer d ia l area. O Turn signal l ights The c orresponding control indicator flashes when the turn signal is on. If the hazard warning lig hts are activated, both control indica tors flash. Rapid flashes: a turn signal b ulb or its associated fuse has failed. Changing bulbs – see p age 218, fuses – see page 212. I Oil p ressure Control indica tor lights up when ignition is switched on. Goes out shortly after eng ine starts. C an light up intermittently when idling with hot engine; must g o out w hen engine speed is increased. Lights up when the engine is running : Engine lub ric ation may be interrupted . This may result in dam age to the engine and/or lock ing of the drive wheels: 1. Depress clutch. 2. Shift transm ission to idling , with automatic transmission 3 or C VTronic 3 move selector lever to N. 3. Steer as quickly as possible out of the stream of traffic, without imped ing other vehicles. 4. Switch the ig nition off (Position I). When the ignition is off, c onsiderab ly more force is needed to brake and steer. Do not remove key until vehicle has come to a stand still, otherwise the steering column lock c ould engage unexpectedly . C heck oil level before consulting a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. 33 v Airb ag system s 3 , belt tensioners 3 see pages 96, 105. W C ool ant temp era ture Lights up when the engine is running: S top vehicle and switch off engine. C oolant temperature is too high: switch off engine. Danger to engine. Coolant fluid temperature disp lay – see page 40. C heck the coolant level immediately – see page 238. R p Brak e system , clutc h system The control indicator lights up when ignition is switched on if handbrake is applied or if brake / clutch fluid level is too low. Further information – see pages 181, 240. Alternator Control indica tor lights up when ignition is switched on. Goes out shortly after eng ine starts. If it lights up when the handbrak e is not applied: stop the vehicle; interrupt your journey immediately . Consult a work shop. We recom mend a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer. 34 Lights up when the engine is running : Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not cha rg ed. Engine cooling m ay not be op erating. With a diesel eng ine, the brake servo unit may stop operating . Consult a work shop. We recommend that y ou consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. X ! r Seat b el t 3 The c ontrol indicator lights up when the ignition is switched on and rem ains lit until the seat belt is fastened. An a coustic signal is also emitted when the car starts to move. Fastening seat belt – see page 98. Preheating 3 for diesel eng ines Control indica tor lights up during prehea ting. Fog tai l light s C ontrol indicator lights up when fog tail light is switc hed on. Preheating system switches on only if outside temperature is low. P T Winter progr amme w ith autom atic tra nsm ission 3 or CVTronic 3 Control indicator lights up when winter programme selected. Further information – see pa ges 147, 155. u Anti-lock Brak e S ystem 3 see p age 182. v Tr action C ontrol system 3, Electronic Stab ility Program me 3 see p ages 168, 170. > Front fog lights 3 Control indica tor lights up when front fog lig hts are switc hed on. Ma in beam C ontrol indicator lights up when ma in beam is on and w hen headlight flash is operated. y Seat occupancy recogniti on 3 see page 105. m C ruise cont rol 3 see page 172. 35 B Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3 Fault in sy stem. C onsult a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. AFL – see page 118. g Trai ler turn signal li ght 3 C ontrol indicator flashes in tim e w ith turn signal lights when towing. Does not fla sh if a turn signal light on the towing vehicle or trailer fa ils. Y Z Fuel l ev el Lit: low fuel level. Fuel gauge in reserv e area. Exhaust gases 3 Control indica tor lights up when ignition is switched on. Goes out shortly after eng ine starts. If it flashes: fuel used up, fill up immediately. Never let the tank run dry! Petrol eng ines: erratic fuel supply can cause ca talytic converter to overheat – see page 164. Diesel engines: if the tank is run d ry , bleed the fuel sy stem as described on pag e 199. 36 Lights up when the engine is running : Fault in emission control system . The permitted em ission limits m ay b e exc eeded. Consult a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If it flashes when the engine is running: For fa ult that ca n lea d to destruction of the catalytic converter – see page 166. C onsult a workshop immediately. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. p A Electro-hydrauli c power a ssisted steering Fault in electro-hydraulic steering system . Power steering may not work. Vehicle c an still be steered, but considera bly more force is required . We recommend you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Engine el ect ronics, tra nsm issi on electr oni cs Fault in engine electronics or transm ission electronics. Electronics switch to emergency running programme. Fuel consum ption may increase and driveability of the vehicle may be impaired – see pag e 166. Fault in imm obiliser system – see pag e 55. Contact a workshop. We recommend your Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. ? Fault in autom atic head light ra nge adjustm ent syst em 3 Contact a workshop immediately . We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer – see page 117. Display in tachometer o Im mobil iser Fault in electronic immobiliser, engine w ill not start – see page 55. Consult a workshop. We recommend tha t you consult a Va ux hall Authorised Repairer. r Pa rking distance sensors 3 see p age 174. s Bootli d open Indicates the luggage compa rtm ent is open. Close the luggage compartment – see page 61. 37 v S w Airb ag systems, belt t ensioners see pages 96, 105. Engine oil l ev el Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil level at the first opportunity . Engine oil level – see pa ge 236. Tyre p ressure control syst em 3, fault see page 176. Bulb repl acement 3 A bulb has failed . C heck the lights, and exchange the failed bulb . Bulb exchange – see page 218. H O pen doors Indicates tha t one or more doors is open. C lose all doors. F v t Brak e lining wear indicat or 3 Front disk b ra ke pad worn to minimum thickness. Contact a workshop to hav e the b ra ke pads changed. We recommend that you contact a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer – see page 180. 38 Coolant lev el Coolant level too low, check the coolant level immediately – see pa ge 239. y P, R, N, D, 1 to 5 Service interv al see p age 234. Automat ic transm ission 3, S elec tor lever position or mode selected see page 146. x P, R, N, D, A, 1 to 6 Tyre pressure contr ol system 3, loss of p ressure warning Check the pressure of the respec tiv e ty re immed iately – see page 176. C VTronic 3, S elec tor lever position or mode selected see page 153. Odometer Records the miles / kilometres driven. Trip odometer To return to zero, depress reset k nob with ignition switched on. Service interv al display – see pa ges 32, 234. Tachometer 1) Spee dome ter 1) Indicates engine speed. Indicates the vehicle speed . Warning zone: m aximum permissible engine sp eed ex ceeded ; danger to engine. 1) The instrum ents in yo ur vehicle m ay d iffer from the instrum ents illustra ted here. 39 For physical reasons, the engine temperature gauge show s the coolant temperature only if the coolant level is adeq uate. During operation the system is pressurised. The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly to ov er 100 °C. Coolant te mperature display Fuel gauge Pointer in zone at left Pointer in left zone or Y lit Pointer between the z ones Pointer in warning zone at right or W is lit 40 = Engine operating tem perature not yet rea ched = Normal operating tem perature = Tem perature too high: Stop, switch off engine, danger to engine, check coolant lev el immediately – see page 239. Pointer in left zone or Y flashing = Reserve area = Fill up – see pag e 163 N ever run the tank dry ! Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the amount of fuel required to fill the tank ma y be less than the spec ified tank cap acity. Inform ation display Tripl e inform ation d isp lay Display of time, outside tempera ture and radio / date. The tim e and outside temperature are displayed when the ignition is on. The date is disp layed when the radio 3 is switched off. When the ignition is off, the time, date and outside tem perature can be presented for 15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the two buttons b elow the displa y. Display of --.- °C or F in the d isplay indicates a fault. H ave the cause rem edied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Graphica l informa tion displa y 3 , Colour inform ation di sp lay 3 Display of date, time, outside tem perature, and informa tion from check control 3, trip computer 3 , electronic air conditioning sy stem 3, radio 3 and Infotainment sy stem 3. The g ra phica l inform ation display presents the information in monochrom e. The colour information display p resents the information in colour. The information d isplay ed depends on the vehicle equipment and the settings of the trip comp uter 3, the electronic air conditioning system 3, the radio 3 and the Infotainment system 3. Electronic air conditioning system – see pag e 134. For operation of the radio and Infotainment system refer to the acc om panying opera ting instruc tions. Display of --. - °C or F in the displa y indicates a fault. Have the cause remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 41 Operating the graphical information display 3 or the colour information display 3 The functions are activated using the buttons on the wiper stalk or b y using the multifunction button if the vehicle is equipp ed with a radio telephone 3 or Infotainm ent system 3 – see Fig. 12824 J. If chec k control issues a warning message, the display is blocked from other func tions. Acknowled ge the message with button § on the wip er stalk 3 or by p ressing the multifunction button. If there are severa l fault warnings, ack nowledge them one a t a time. 42 The trip computer functions a re activated using the m enus on the disp lay and the buttons on the wiper sta lk 3 or via the radio telep hone 3 or Infota inm ent system 3 . Ac tiv ation using buttons on wiper stalk: The individual menu items are selec ted using the h and i buttons and selected by pressing the § button. To activa te the trip computer, press the § button. Ac tiv ation using multi-function button: the indiv idua l menu items are selected by rotating and selected b y pressing. Press BC button on system to activate the trip computer. System settings The figures show execution with the colour inform ation display . In the trip computer settings menu, select System Setti ngs. O n vehicles without trip comp uter, press button § on the wiper stalk 3. The sy stem settings menu will b e displayed. Language selec tion You ca n select the display language for som e functions. Select the required lang uag e from the list. Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of the menu item. Sett ing units of measure Y ou can select which units of mea sure are to be used. In the System Set tings menu, select item Instruct ions. In the Syst em Settings m enu, select item Unit s. The list of availab le languages will be displayed. S elec t from the list of units that opens. S elec tions are indic ated b y a 6 in front of the menu item. 43 Set displa y m ode The display can b e adjusted to suit the light conditions, b la ck or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a dark bac kground. In the System Setti ngs menu, select item Automat ic, Day or Ni ght. Automat ic: Adjustment depending on vehicle lighting. Da y: Black or coloured text on light background. Night: White or coloured text on dark background. Adj ust contrast In the System Set tings menu, select item Cont rast. The c ontrast menu w ill be d isplay ed. Confirm the required setting. Setting date and time In system s w ith a GPS receiver 1) (Infotainm ent system 3, radio telephone with GPS m od ule 3) the tim e and da te are automatically set when a GPS satellite signal is received . If the displa yed time does not ma tc h the local tim e, the time can be corrected by making manual entries in steps of 30 minutes or autom atically by receiving a n RDS time signa l2) 3 . In rad ios without a GPS receiv er, the time and d ate c an be adjusted manually or automatically using the RDS time signal 3. S om e RDS transmitters d o not send correct time signa ls. If the incorrect tim e is displayed often, d eactiva te the automa tic time synchronisation 3 and set the time ma nually. The autom atic setting is ind ic ated b y Ö in the display . 1) 2) 44 GPS = G lob al P osition in g System, Satellite system for world -wide p osition in g. RDS = R a dio Da ta System. Deactivating a nd activating automatic setting Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., c lock display is now in setting mode. Press Ö twice (until y ear flashes). Press and hold down Ö for ap prox . 3 seconds until } flashes in display a nd text " RDS TIM E" a ppears (years fla sh during this time). Display indicates: RDS TIME 0 = Deactivated RDS TIME 1 = Activa ted Press Ö three times. Vehi cles w ith tri ple informat ion displa y Manual setting Switch off radio. Press Ö and ; below display a s follows: Vehicles with gr aphical informat ion di sp lay 3 or colour inform ation d isp lay 3 In the Syst em Settings menu, select item Tim e / Date. Press Ö for ap prox . 2 seconds: Day fla shes ;: Set day The menu for time / date will be display ed. Ö : Month fla shes ;: Set month Ö : Year flashes ;: Set year Ö : Hours flash ;: Set hours Ö : Minutes flash ;: Set minutes S elec t the menu items required. Mak e the desired setting s a nd confirm. S elec t menu item O K. C orrecting time 3 To correc t the time, use RDS in the Time / Date menu to select item Auto. Ti me C orrec tion. The field behind Auto. Time Correcti on will be ticked. Ö : Clock is started. 45 Check control 3 Check control monitors several fluid levels, the tyre pressure 3, the radio frequency remote control ba tteries, the anti-theft alarm system 3 and im portant external lig hts, including the cables and fuses. In tra iler mode, the tra iler lighting is also monitored. Once the ignition has been switched on, all check control functions are autom atically verified . Fault warnings appear on the display. If there a re sev eral fault warnings, they are display ed one after the other. Outs ide tempe rature A fall in temperature is indica ted immediately and a rise in temp erature after a time delay . O n v ehicles with trip le inform ation display, the sym bol T is shown in the disp lay from 3 °C as a warning for icy road surfaces. O n vehicles w ith g ra phic al information display 3 or c olour information displa y 3 a message is shown in the display to warn for icy road surfaces. See figure. Caution: The road surface may already be icy even though the display indicates a few degrees above 0 °C . 46 Some of the fault warnings appea r on the display in an abb reviated form. Ac know ledge fault displays as described on p age 42. Fault warnings: Check r em ote control batt ery If battery volta ge of the remote control unit is too low – see page 57. Check b rake lig ht switch Fault. Brake light does not come on when brak e ap plied. Have cause of fault remedied imm ediately. We recom mend that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. Check sa feg ua rd Fault. Sy stem error in a nti-theft alarm system. Have cause of fault remedied imm ediately. We recomm end that y ou consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer. If there is a fault in the lighting sy stem, the respective location of the fault is displayed as tex t, e.g.: C heck right brak e light If brak e light is defective, the relev ant tail light takes ov er the brake light function. Check w ash fluid level Fluid level in wind screen wash system too low . Top up wa sh fluid – see p age 242. Rear window wash sy stem 3 and headlight wash system 3 a re deactivated if wash fluid is low. I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly The check control 3 autom atically checks all functions after the battery has been reconnected or c ha rg ed. Stored fault warnings appear on the display one after the other. Bulb exchange – see page 218. If tyre pressure is too low, the disp lay indicates the tyre to check, e. g.: Check rear r ight t yre pressur e Check ty re pressure at next opportunity, using suitable tyre pressure gauge. Tyre pressure control sy stem 3 – see page 176. Checking tyre pressure – see p age 184. If there is major loss of pressure in a tyre, the d isplay indicates the tyre a t fault, e. g.: R ear left tyr e pressure loss Stop im med ia tely a nd check tyre. Tyre pressure control sy stem 3 – see page 176. 47 Trip computer 3 The trip computer show s v ehicle data which it continually records and evaluates electronic ally . Some of the functions a ppear on the display in a n abbrev iated form. Functions: z Rang e, z Effective consump tion, z Av erage consump tion, z Instantaneous consumption, z Av erage speed, z Distance, z Settings. Check control warnings a lways have priority. 48 Range over 30 m iles (50 km) Range is calculated from current fuel ta nk content and instantaneous consumption. The display shows avera ge v alues. The ra nge updates automatically after a brief delay after the v ehicle has b een refuelled. Manual updating is also possible – see page 50. Ra ng e b el ow 30 m iles (50 km) If the fuel in the tank will allow less than 30 miles (50 km), a warning "Range" appears on the display . Effect ive consumpt ion Shows the a mount of fuel consumed . The measurement can be restarted at any time – see pa ge 50. Average consumpt ion Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. The measurement c an be restarted at any time – see page 50. I nsta ntaneous c onsump tion Display c hanges depending on sp eed: Display in g al/h below 8 m ph (13 km /h), Display in m pg above 8 mph (13 km /h). 49 Averag e sp eed Average speed calculation. Measurement can be restarted at any time, see right-hand column. Stoppag es in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the ca lc ulations. Di st ance trav ell ed Display s number of miles (kilometres) driven. Measurement can be restarted at any time, see right-ha nd colum n. Reset current trip comput er i nformati on The following trip com puter inform ation can b e reset (restart measurements): z z z z z Range (only with vehicle stationary), Effective consum ption, Average consum ption, Average speed, Distance travelled. S elec t the required items from the trip computer menu. Then select menu item Settings. The Settings menu is displayed. 50 I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost. Select BC Reset present in the Settings menu. The v alue for the selected function will b e reset and reca lculated. The range values can only be reset if the vehic le is stationary. After resetting, "- - -" is displayed with the trip computer information selected. The reca lculated v alues are d isplay ed after a brief delay . Resetting multip le informat ion on the trip com puter The follow ing trip computer information can be reset simultaneously (restart measurements): z z z z Effective consumption, Average consumption, Average speed, Distanc e travelled. Select menu item BC Reset all in the Settings menu. The v alues are reset a nd "* **" is d isplay ed. New values are only displayed when the engine is running. The av erage speed is calculated shortly after starting to drive. 51 As the vehicle aeria l is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting compa nies cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of reception a s is obtained with a domestic ra dio using an ov erhead aerial. z C hanges in distance from the transm itter, z Multi-path reception due to reflection and z S hadowing may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss of reception a ltogether. Infotainment system 3 Radio 3 The rad io is operated as described in the opera ting instruc tions supp lied. The d isplay for the radio ap pears on the inform ation d isplay . Ca r radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: The Infotainm ent system is operated as described in the operating instructions supplied. Depend ing on the v ersion, the Infotainm ent system conta ins telematics (telep hone). Electronic data acquisition in toll sys tem s 3 O n vehicles with heat-reflecting windscreens1 ) 3, m ount the c hipca rd 3 for electronic data a cquisition and billing in the black shaded zone of the windsc reen on the left or the right behind the interior rear-view m irror, see figure. If the chipc ard is mounted outside this zone, malfunctions ma y occur in data acquisition. 1) 52 Sola r Reflect. Mobile te lephones and radio equipment (CB) 3 The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed when fitting and operating a m ob ile telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te the v ehicle’ s op erating permit (EU Directive 95/54/EG). Prerequisites for fault-free op eration: z Professionally installed ex terior aerial to ob ta in the max imum range possible, z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt, z Installation of the telephone in a suitab le spot (see note on pag e 107). Obtain ad vice on p redetermined installation loc ations for the external antenna and equipment holder and way s of using dev ices w ith transmission power of more than 10 Wa tts. We recom mend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have brack ets and various installation k its av ailable as accessories and will install them in accordance with regulations. Be sure to use the handsfree attachment if using the telephone w hilst driving. Ev en this can be a distraction while driving. Please ob serve country-spec ific regulations. When used in the v ehicle interior, mobile telephones and radio equipment (C B) with integrated aerial may cause malfunctions in the vehicle electronics. Mobile telephones and radio equipm ent (CB) should only be used with an aerial fitted on the vehicle exterior. 53 Keys, doors, bonnet Re place ment ke ys The key is a c onstituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem free op eration of the electronic immobiliser. Y ou will avoid unnecessary costs, difficulties with insurance comp anies when processing claims and problems asserting wa rranty claims. Keep the sp are k ey accessible in a safe place. Locks – see page 248. Lock cylinders Designed to free-wheel if they are forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or if the correct key is not fully inserted. To reset, turn cy linder with the c orrect key until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key through 180° and rep eat op eration. 54 Child safety locks Use the child safety lock whenever child ren are occupying the rear seats. Disregard may lea d to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle p assengers should be informed accordingly. Using k ey, turn lever on rear door lock from the vertical position: door cannot then be opened from inside. Ele ctronic imm obilise r The sy stem checks whether the vehicle m ay be sta rted using the key that has been inserted. If the k ey is recognised as "authorised" the vehicle can be started. The c heck is carried out via a transponder housed in the k ey – see page 56. To act ivat e: Switch off eng ine, turn key to position 0 and remove. To deacti vate: Turn key to position I I (ignition on); the engine can then b e started. Dea ctivation is not possib le in any other way , so keep spare key accessible in a safe place! Control i nd icator for imm obiliser If control indicator o lights when the ignition is switc hed on, the key is not recognised by the system and the engine cannot b e started: 1. Turn key to 0 in the ignition a nd remove. 2. Reinsert key in ignition switch. 3. Then repeat starting procedure. If the control ind ic ator o remains lit, try to start the engine using the spare key and consult a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the control indicator flashes whilst the ignition is on A , there is a fault in the eng ine electronic s. The engine cannot be started – see page 166. Not e The immobiliser does not lock the doors. Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways lock it and switch on the anti-theft alarm system 3 – see p ages 58, 63. The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s data and should therefore not be kept in the vehicle. Hav e y our Car Pass on hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 55 Position m em ory on v ehic les w ith electric ally operated front seats 3 When the vehicle is loc ked using the ra dio freq uency remote c ontrol, the current position of the driver’s seat and the exterior and interior m irrors are stored. Personal settings sa ved using va rious radio freq uency remote controls can b e retrieved as follows: open driver’s door within one minute of unlocking and the positions stored using the radio frequency remote control are automa tic ally set – see pag e 80. C entra l lock ing system, see page 58. Radio fre quency re mote control The rad io frequency remote control is integrated in the key . Used to op erate z central locking system, z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, z boot lid , tailgate, z Vauxhall ala rm system 3 . Electric windows can be opened and closed 3 using the remote control unit. The electric sun roof 3 c an be c losed using the rem ote control unit. The remote control has a range of approx. 3 metres. The range can b e affected b y external influences. Point the remote control at the v ehicle when opera ting. 56 For your conv enience, we recommend that the central lock ing sy stem alway s be op erated using the remote control unit. Handle remote control with care, protect from moisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary operation. Function check by brief illum ination of ha zard warning flashers. Mechanic al anti -theft locki ng system 3 , see page 58. Boot l id or ta ilgat e, see page 61. Vauxhall ala rm system 3, see page 63. Electric w indows 3 , see page 120. Electrica lly op era ted sun roof 3, see page 123. Fault If the central locking system cannot be opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e due to the following : Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with env ironmental protec tion regulations. After replacing batteries, synchronise remote control: unlocking door using k ey in lock – see next page. Insert key into ignition. z The range of the rem ote control has been ex ceeded. z Remote control b attery v oltag e too low, cha nge batteries, see nex t colum n. z Freq uent, rep eated opera tion of the remote control outside the reception ra nge of the vehicle (e.g. too far from vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer recognised). To synchronise remote control, see nex t column. z If the centra l loc king sy stem is ov erloaded as a result of repeated op eration at short interv als, the power supply is c ut off for approx . 30 second s. Changing the rem ote control ba ttery Exchange the battery as soon as the range of the rem ote control starts to become reduced. z Interference from higher-power radio waves from other sources. Insert a sma ll screwdriver in the notch in the clip and lift. Pull the k ey part from the remote control. For c entral locking sy stem operation using key – see following pa ges. Ha ve c ause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The transponder for the imm ob iliser is in the front of the k ey. Make sure that it is not damaged or detached. Open the remote c ontrol. Replace the battery, ensuring that it is inserted correc tly (see pa ge 275 regarding b attery ty pe). Close the remote control, insert it in the k ey part and ma ke sure it audibly engages. 57 Turn key in driver’s door loc k towards rear of vehicle ag ain within 10 seconds after locking, then turn it back to the vertica l position a nd remove. Lock buttons on all doors are positioned such tha t doors ca nnot be opened. Do not use the sy stem if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot b e unlocked from inside. Central locking system For doors, boot lid / tailgate and tank flap. Locking Press button p on rem ote control unit – or – Turn key in driver’ s door lock towards rear of vehic le; then turn it b ack to the vertical position and remove. Alternatively, when locking from inside the vehicle, press the central locking switch m in one of the front doors 3 with the doors closed. 58 Securing wi th the mechanica l anti-t heft locking system 3 All d oors must b e closed. The driver’ s door must hav e been opened after the ig nition was switched on. Within 10 seconds of lock ing , press button p on the remote control aga in – or – Not e z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly , the central loc king sy stem will unlock again immediately after lock ing. z 30 seconds after unlocking using the radio frequenc y remote control the doors autom atically lock again if neither a door nor the luggage compartment has been opened. z To loc k the d oors from within (e.g . to prevent und esired a ccess from outside), press the central lock ing sw itch m. To unlock: To unlock only the driv er’s door: Press button q on remote control unit onc e – or – Turn key in driver’ s door lock once towards front of v ehicle, then turn it back to the vertic al position and remove. Unlock entire vehic le Press button q on rem ote control unit twice – or – Turn key in driver’ s door lock towards front of vehic le twice; then turn it bac k to the vertic al position and remove. Alternatively , when unlocking from the inside, press central locking switch m on one of the front doors 3. Central l oc king sw itch for loc king and unlock ing the doors from insid e the vehicle Press button m on one of the front doors 3: the doors are lock ed or unlocked as appropriate. z Locked doors unlock a utoma tica lly if an accident of a certain sev erity occ urs (to permit outside assistance) – prerequisite: ignition must not be switched off. When the mechanical anti-theft locking sy stem is active – see pag e 58, the doors cannot b e unlocked with this b utton. 59 O per ation of wi ndows and sun roof 3 O n vehicles w ith electronically operated windows, the windows can be op ened a nd closed from outside: Hold d ow n b utton q or button p on the remote control unit, or hold the k ey in the appropriate position in the door lock, until all windows a re open or fully closed. The sun roof can be closed from outside: Hold b utton p on the remote control depressed or hold the key in the appropriate position in the door lock until the sun roof is fully closed . Care must be taken when operating the elec tric windows and the sun roof. There is a risk of injury, especially for child ren, and a danger that articles could become trap ped. Vehicle passengers should be informed according ly . Keep a close wa tch on the windows and sun roof w hen closing them . Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they m ov e. Overloa d If the centra l locking system is overloa ded as a result of repeated operation at short intervals, the p ow er supply is cut off for approx. 30 seconds. The system is protected b y a fuse in the fusebox – see pag e 212. For further inform ation on windows and the sun roof – see pages 122, 124. Malfunction in central locking sys te m e.g. if vehicle battery is flat. A = Unlock driv er’s door Turn key forward in lock p ast resistance p oint as far as it w ill go. Turn key back to vertical position and remove. B = Lock driver’s door With driver’ s d oor c losed , turn key towards rea r of vehicle until it will not mov e any further. Turn k ey back to vertical position and remove. The other doors can be opened and closed by pulling or pushing the interior lock button (not p ossible if a nti-theft ala rm system enabled beforeha nd ). Have cause of fault remedied. We rec om mend that y ou consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer. 60 Luggage compartment To unlock: Press button r on remote control – or – Press button q on rem ote control twice – or – Turn key in driver’ s door lock forwa rd twice, turn to vertical position and remove – or – Press button x in d riv er or passenger side d oor 3. The lug gage compartment is unlocked and can be opened within 5 minutes. O n the Saloon, this is d one b y pressing the button; on the esta te car, by p ulling the button under the handle. If the luggage comp artm ent is open w hen the ignition is on, s lights up in the tachom eter displa y. A w arning b uz zer will sound when the vehicle starts off. There is a handle on the inside of the luggage compa rtm ent lid or tailgate for closing the luggage compa rtm ent. If the lug gage c om partment is not opened within 5 minutes, it is automatically locked again. If the luggage comp artm ent is unlock ed the number plate lights come on and illuminate the area behind the vehicle. If the luggage comp artm ent has been unlocked and opened, it is autom atically lock ed again 5 minutes after closing. The luggage compartment is autom atic ally locked when the speed reaches 2.5 mph (4 km /h). 61 Boot li d, Sal oon The door central locking system ca nnot be locked or unlock ed using the lugga ge compartment lock. Key slot in lock in horizontal position The lugga ge com partment ca n be lock ed and unlocked by op erating the remote control or using the key in the driver’s sid e lock. Key slot in lock in v ertical position The lugga ge com partment also rem ains locked after unlocking using the remote control or using the key in the driver’s sid e lock. This position m ust be selected if the luggage compartment is to remain lock ed whenever this occurs. 62 Locking using k ey in luggage compa rtm ent lock Turn key c lock wise from vertical or horizontal position as far a s it will go. To guard against being lock ed out, the key cannot then be removed. After the luggage compartment has been closed and the k ey turned back to the horizontal or vertical position, the luggage compa rtm ent is locked again. O pen luggag e c om part ment Do not drive with the luggage compartment op en or ajar, e.g. when tra nsporting bulky ob jects, since toxic exhaust gas could penetrate the interior. Fitting accessories to the boot lid or tailgate will increase its weight. I f it becomes too hea vy, the boot lid or ta ilg ate will then not stay op en. Vauxhall alarm s yste m 3 monitors: z the doors, luggage compartment, bonnet, z the passenger c om partment, z vehicle tilt, e. g. if it is raised, z the ignition. To activ ate: All doors, windows a nd sun roof 3 must be closed; press button p on the rem ote control unit again within 10 seconds after lock ing – or – Turn key in d riv er’s door lock toward s rear of vehicle again within 10 sec onds after lock ing , then turn it back to the v ertical position and remove. Sw itching system on excl ud ing m oni toring of the pa ssenger com partm ent and the v ehicl e t ilt e.g. if anim als a re to be left in the vehic le. 1. Close tailgate and b onnet. 2. Press b utton Ä. The LED in the b utton fla shes (max imum 10 seconds) – see next p age. 3. Close doors. 4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system . LED lights up. After app rox . 10 second s the system is activated, without m onitoring of the passenger compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until sy stem is switched off. 6 63 After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED flashes = System on z LED lights up for approx . 1 second = Switch-off If a system fa ult occ urs, consult a work shop. We recom mend a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer. Light emit ting d iode (LED) During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED lights up = Test, switch-on delay z LED flashes = Door, tailgate, bonnet open or system fault 64 To deact ivat e: Press button q on remote control – or – Turn k ey in driver’s door lock towards front of vehicle, then turn it back to the vertica l position a nd remove. Ala rm O nly a certain num ber of a la rm s are allowed to be trigg ered while the anti-theft alarm system is switched on (this number is stipula ted b y law). The alarm takes the form of: z an acoustic signal (horn) a nd z a visual sig nal (haz ard warning lights). The duration of the a larm signals is limited due to lega l regulations. Alarm c an be cancelled by pressing a button on the remote control. The antitheft wa rning system is switched off at the same time by p ressing the button q . O peni ng and cl osing boot lid or tail gate using remote contr ol unit butt on r wit h anti -theft alarm system enabled 1. Press button r on remote c ontrol, lugga ge c om partment is unlocked – see pa ge 61, and passenger com partment and v ehicle tilt is disabled. 2. Opening lugg age com partment – see pa ge 61. 3. After closing the luggage compartment the monitoring of the passenger com partment a nd vehicle tilt is enabled again after ap prox . 10 seconds. Opening a nd closing the lugg age compa rtment wit h the key in the luggag e compa rtment lock 3 w ith anti-theft alarm system enabled 1. Turn key clockwise as fa r as it will go: the lugg age com partment is unlocked and m onitoring of the pa ssenger compa rtm ent and v ehicle tilt is deactivated. 2. O pening luggage compa rtm ent – see page 61. 3. C lose lug gage compartment. 4. Turn k ey ba ck to previous position: After approx . 10 second s, monitoring of the passenger compartment, lug gage compa rtm ent and vehicle tilt is resumed. Alarm siren with integrated battery 3 The alarm siren monitors the on-board voltage network and triggers an ala rm if this network is manipulated (e.g . if the vehicle’s ba ttery is disconnected by unauthorised persons). The alarm siren ha s its own power supply and is therefore not dependent on the vehicles battery . If the vehicle’s battery is to be disconnected (e.g. for maintenance w ork ), the alarm siren must be dea ctivated as follows: sw itch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15 seconds. To swit ch off alarm siren: S witc h ignition on then off. 65 Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer for details on compatible systems. Ensure that no persons, animals or objec ts are in the m ov ement zone of the system to be operated (e.g. a ga ra ge door). Vehicle passeng ers should be inform ed of the hazards. Basic program ming of t he univ er sa l rad io control syst em 1. Switch on ignition. 2. When programming for the first time, press both outer buttons under the mirror housing, until the control indicator along side the b uttons fla shes rapidly . 3. Hold the ma nual remote control unit at a distance of 0 to 30 c m from the control button area of the mirror housing. 4. Press the button on the manual rem ote control unit while p ressing and holding the desired button of the univ ersal radio frequency remote control. Universal radio frequency remote control in mirror housing 3 To opera te up to 3 different remotely opera ted systems (e.g. garage door, domestic alarm system, domestic exterior lighting ). The p rogram med univ ersal radio frequenc y rem ote control can rep lace the individual remote control units of the systems to be operated. Three buttons on the underside of the m irror housing can be used to operate v arious systems. 66 5. The control ind ic ator in the mirror housing will flash slowly at first. As soon as it flashes rap id ly, release both buttons. The universal radio control sy stem is now programmed for the chosen system. 6. To programme other buttons w ith other sy stems, repeat steps 3 to 5. If a sy stem does not operate the device desp ite repeated programm ing and the control ind icator briefly flashes rapidly and then shines with a steady g low for 2 seconds, the receiver m ay be fitted with a variable code system – see next page. Program ming t he univ er sa l radio control system for varia ble code systems 1. Perform basic programming – see previous page. 2. Activ ate synchronisation mode of system (see sy stem manufacturer’s system operating m anual) and briefly press the pre-p rogram med button on the univ ersal radio freq uency remote control three times w ithin 30 second s. 3. The radio control sy stem is now prog ra mmed for variable code system s. To prog ra mme other systems for variable codes, repeat the above procedure for the other buttons of the universal ra dio control system . Using the univ ersal radio cont rol system With the ignition on, press the required universal radio control button, and the control indica tor in the mirror housing will illuminate. The pre-p rogram med sy stem can now be operated using the universal radio control sy stem. Rep rogram ming ind ivid ua l butt on sett ings If a button that has already been prog ra mmed is to be used for a different sy stem, simply repeat steps 3 to 5 of the basic programming procedure described previously . Erasing all prog ramm ed button settings Before selling the vehic le, it is a good idea to erase b utton settings. Button settings can only be era sed as a unit. I t is not p ossible to erase individual button settings. Buttons can, how ever, be indiv idua lly rep rogram med (see " Reprogramm ing ind iv idual button settings"). In order to erase the programming of all 3 buttons, press both outer buttons and relea se as soon as the LED begins to flash (a fter approx. 20 seconds). All button settings hav e now been cleared and can be prog ra mmed anew at any tim e. Not e Retain the ma nual remote control in case reprog ra mming is required. It is also possible to continue using the manual remote control. If a fter repeated ly performing the above steps a system fails to respond to the universal rad io control, consult a workshop. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. During programm ing, the vehicle should be within the range of the receiv er. Under no circumstances should the vehicle be in the mov ement zone of a system (e. g. garag e door). Do not programm e systems which do not have an automatic safety stop (manufactured b efore 1982). Take note of the sy stem ma nufacturer’s safety instructions for drives a nd manual remote control units. 67 The b onnet is held open automatically. To close the bonnet, lower it slow ly and allow it to fall into the lock und er its own weight. C heck that the b onnet is locked in position by pulling at its front edge. If it is not eng aged, repeat the procedure. Bonnet To open the bonnet, p ull the outer release lev er / located below the instrument panel on the driver’s side. The bonnet will then be unlocked and will partially open. Return the relea se lev er to its origina l position. 68 There is a safety catch on the underside of the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the bonnet. When the bonnet is opened, snow or d irt on the bonnet can slide down and obstruct the air inta ke. Air intak e – see page 142. Seats, Interior Adjusting the front s eats see p age 5. Electrically adjustable front seats 3 see p age 79. Increasing luggage compartment size by folding down the front seats see p age 82. Seat pos ition Adjust driver’s sea t such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slig htly bent. Push p assenger seat as far b ack as possible. The seat back rests m ust not be tilted too far ba ck (recom mended tilting angle app rox . 25° ). Imp ortant: Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25cm) from the steering w heel, to permit safe airbag d eploym ent. Disregard can lead to injuries which could be fa tal. Vehicle passengers should be informed ac cord ingly . 69 Head restraint position He ad res traints The midd le of the head restraint should be at eye lev el. I f this is not possible for extremely tall persons, set to highest position, and set to lowest position for small persons. To rem ov e head restraints: Release the two springs by pressing them and d etach the head restraint. Disreg ard can lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle p assengers should be informed accordingly. Setting – see page 7 and right hand column. 70 Rear head restraints, integrated in the re ar se at backres t 3 Setting – see page 7. To adjust them, pull the head restraint forwards with both hands and at the same time adjust the height. To enlarge the luggage compa rtm ent, push the hea d restra int all the w ay down – see p age 7. The head restraints can be moved to the lowest position to improve visib ility where seats are unocc upied. Armrest 3 between the front s eats The arm rest can be pushed forw ard. If the armrest is not req uired, push it back and fold it up. To op en, slide the armrest back, press the button on the front and open. Rear seat armrest The armrest can be folded down. If the rear centre seat is being used or the rear sea t ba ckrests are b eing folded down, fold armrest up ward. To open, p ress the button on the front and open. The maximum permitted load on the stowage compartment is 0.5 kg . 71 Travel As sistant 3 Instal ling the Trav el Assista nt Insert the tw o rear push-in sleeves into the marked recesses in the ba ckrest and enga ge. 72 Swivel open a nd hold cover of front attachment points in floor in front of console. S wivel c onnecting console d ownw ard and eng age in attachment points. Swiv el the locking lev er downwards. Check the locking p osition of the Travel Assistant: the red mark (see Fig. 15028 J) must not be visible. Otherw ise, lock using the key – see page 77, Fig. 15037 J . To lock, insert Tra vel Assistant into recesses in connecting console and slid e back as fa r as possible. If it is correctly locked, the red m ark must no longer b e v isible in the window, otherwise the procedure must be repeated . If it is not correctly locked, the Travel Assistant could b e propelled forward with considera ble force when hard braking occurs, risk of injury. 6 73 The up per stowage compartment is located under the armrest. To open, press the button and fold the armrest upwa rds. Drink hol der and ac cessory soc kets O pen the drink hold er by pressing the marking. O nly accessories with max imum power consump tion of 120 Watts must be connected to the a ccessory sock ets. For notes – see pa ge 89. 74 Stowa ge compa rtments Open the lower stowag e com partment by pressing the mark ing. The underside of the compartment has an opening through whic h the objects in the compartment can be ra ised. Connecting consol e for DVD pl ayer 3 Pull connecting console upward, p ress button and slid e downward . Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD player display into brack et from below a nd fix in position with brack et. Electric c ool box To open, fold open the armrest together with the stowage compa rtm ent. Maximum loa d: 1 kg. 75 Switch on the cool box as needed. Ta bles Fold arm rest upward (1). Use recessed grip to p ull tab le upward as fa r a s it will go (1), sw iv el table forw ard (2) and fold downward (3). 76 S et required clearance b y adjusting longitudinal position of table (4). To fold away the tab le, swivel the armrest up. Push the table forw ard as far as it will go (1). Fold the table upwards p ast the resistance point (2), swiv el it downwards and insert in the Travel Assista nt (3). Swivel armrest down. Remov ing the Trav el Assistant O pen catch using key , red mark appears in window. 6 77 Pull the Tra vel Assistant to the front on the connecting console and remove. Fit the protec tiv e cov er 3 on the plug. 78 Press the locking lev er down, press the button on the front of the connecting console a nd sw iv el the locking lev er up wards. S wivel connecting c onsole upward and pull out of recesses. Adjusting the long itudinal p osition Move switch 1 forwa rd s / ba ckwards. Ele ctrically adjustable front se ats 3 Care must be taken when operating the elec trically adjustab le sea ts. There is a risk of injury, p articularly for children, and a danger that articles could become trap ped. Height adjustm ent Move switch 1 upw ards / downwards at rear. S eat ba ck adjustment Turn sw itch 2 forwards / backw ards. Keep a close watch on the seats when adjusting them. O perate switch until desired seat position is reached. Seat position – see p age 69. Vehicle passengers should be informed according ly . After a djusting the seat, adjust height of seat belt – see page 98. Adjustment The seat p osition can be adjusted by means of switches on the outboard side of the seats. Ad justing the inclination Move switch 1 upwards / downwards at front. 79 Elec trical ly operat ed lumba r sup port 3 on driv er’s seat Adjust lumb ar support using four-way switch on outboard side of driver’s seat. Adjust lumb ar support to suit personal req uirements. Moving support up and d ow n: push b utton up or down. Increa sing and decreasing support: push button forward or backwa rd. 80 Thi gh sup port 3 on driver’s seat To adjust, lift handle at front and slide sea t padding. Do not a djust the thigh support whilst driving. Memory function 3 for elec trical ly ad justable dri ver’s sea t, exterior mirrors and interior mi rror Three different seat and mirror settings can be stored (e.g. for three drivers). Readiness for operation Storing settings z With ignition on, 1. Adjust seat, z Within 10 m inutes of switching ignition off, 2. Adjust interior mirror – see page 8, z Within 10 m inutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z Within 10 m inutes of inserting or removing the ignition k ey. Readiness for operation stops when the vehic le is locked. 3. Adjust exterior mirror – see page 8, 4. Press m emory button M and the position button to be used (1, 2 or 3) simulta neously, and stora ge is ack nowledged by an acoustic signal. Retriev ing settings Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the stored sea t and mirror positions have b een reached . For reasons of safety, seat adjustm ent stops immediately if the p osition button is relea sed or one of the setting buttons is op erated. Ad justments may only be performed with vehicle stationary. S tore and activ ate the setting s using the remote controls When the vehicle is loc ked with the radio freq uency remote c ontrol, the current positions of the d riv er’s seat, the exterior mirrors and the interior m irror a re stored. Personal settings stored using different radio frequency remote controls can be retrieved as follows: op en driver’s door within one m inute of unlocking a nd the positions stored using the radio frequency remote control are autom atically set. The seat adjusting proc edure can be stopped immediately if required by operating a setting button. Passeng er m irror w ith par king a id see page 8. O verload If the seat setting is electrically overloaded, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time. The sy stem is protected by a fuse in the fusebox – see page 212. 81 Luggage compartment extens ion Fold dow n the cover behind the arm rest Fold down the a rm rest on to the seat cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover forwards. The outer seats can continue to be used for passengers. Enga ge the cover behind the centre armrest a udib ly in position. Cover behind arm rest can be locked from lugg age compartment 3: turn handle 90°: Folding d own the rear seat ba ckrests Push the rear head restraints right down. Locked = Unlock ed = Place the b elt buckles in storage pockets in the seat cushions. Handle horiz ontal Handle vertic al Push front seats forwards a little. Remove Travel Assistant 3 – see page 77. Unlock one or both rear sea t backrests by depressing p ushbuttons and fold down on to seat cushion. Return the air front seats to the desired positions. 82 Luggage compartment cover 3, 5-door Saloon (Hatch) When returning rear seat back rests to upright, they should audibly click into position. Fold ing down t he front passenger seat 3 Push head restra int on front passenger’s seat down as far as it will g o. The three-point seat belt for the centre rear seat can only be pulled out of the retractor if the rear seat backrests are prop erly locked into position. Slide back the front p assenger seat. To remove, unhook the retaining straps from the tailgate. Fold front passenger sea t forwa rd by ra ising release lever. Fit in reverse order. O n some versions, the rear seat b ackrests can be locked 3 : insert the key in the lock nex t to the pushbutton, turn 180° a nd rem ov e – see figure. Remove the cover from the side guides. When returning front passenger seat backrest to upright, it should audibly c lic k into position. Notes on loading see p age 88. 83 Luggage compartment cover 3, Estate Rem oving Open luggage compartment cover. Safety net 3, Estate To close: Pull lug gage compartment cover toward s rea r of vehicle using handle and hook into side retainers. Move release lev er on right side of lug gage compartment cov er upwa rd . Lift rig ht cover a nd remove from brac kets. The safety net can be fitted behind the rear seats or, with the rear seat back rest folded down, behind the front seats. Fit ting Fit the lug gage compartment cover in the bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the relea se lever on the right-ha nd side, fit the lugg age compartment cover in the bracket on the right-hand side and p ress the relea se lev er closed. Fitti ng behind the rear seats Remove the luggage comp artm ent cover. Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover. To open: Remove luggag e compartment c ov er from side b ra ckets. I t rolls up automatically . 84 Fit the ca ssette with rolled safety net into the side brack ets and enga ge b y twisting . Ex tend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the net rod in the fitting opening on one side and then the other and engage by pushing forward. Fit the luggage compa rtm ent cover. Removing Remove the lug gage compartment cover. Detach the safety net rod from the brackets in the roof frame. Slide both latches inwards; push the cassette with rolled net rea rw ards in the bracket, twist and rem ov e upw ards. Fitti ng behind front seats Fold both rear seat back rests. Place the rolled net on the floor behind the front seats in suc h a way that the cog rail in the slit on the net is to the rear. Pull ea ch side hook from the cassette and attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor. Extend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the net rod in the fitting opening on one side and then the other and engag e by pushing forward. Removing Detach the safety net rod from the brack ets in the roof frame. Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the vehicle floor. 85 Lashing eyes FlexO rganizer 3 These enable loads to be secured in position in the lugga ge compartment using lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3 . Flexible sy stem for dividing the luggage compartment or securing load s in an Estate. The components are housed in a stow age compartment at the rea r in the load floor – see p age 92. The system c onsists of z variab le partition net z variab le partition wall z partition rod z mesh p oc kets for the side walls z hooks The components can be mounted in the two guide ra ils in the side walls of the lugg age compartment. 86 The figures show examples of possible uses. Varia ble part ition wa ll Fig. 15179 J . Press the rod s of the partition wall together slightly and engage in the desired guide rail openings in the side walls. The rods c an be engaged in various positions. Varia ble part ition net Fig. 15180 J . Press the rod s of the partition net tog ether slightly and engage in the desired guide rail openings in the side walls. The rods c an be engaged in various positions. The partition net can be mounted vertically or horizontally at different levels. Hooks and mesh poc kets for the sid e wa lls Fig. 15181 J. Engage the hooks in the openings of the guide rails in the sid e walls as indic ated in the figure and turn 90°. The mesh pockets can be hung from the hooks. Rem oving Press together the rods of the partition wall / net or the telescopic rods and remove from the guide rails. Turn the hook s 90° and rem ov e. FlexOrga nizer stowa ge FlexOrga nizer c om ponents are housed in a stowage compa rtm ent at the rear in the loa d floor. To open, ra ise the handle and op en the flap – see pag e 92, Fig. 15171 J. To stow, pull apa rt the partition wall / net rods as well as the sepa rate telescopic rod in the middle and fold them in half. Roll the partition wa ll and net together and place it in the compartment with the other components. C lose the c ov er. 87 z Do not place any objec ts in front of the rear window or on the instrum ent panel. They a re reflected in the glass, obstruct the driver’s view and will be thrown through the vehicle, for instance in the event of heavy braking. Notes on loading the vehicle z Heav y objec ts in the lug gage com partment should be placed as far forward as possible aga inst the engag ed rear seat backrests or, if the rear seat backrests are folded down, against the front seat b ackrests. If objects a re to be stacked, the heav ier objects should be placed at the b ottom. Unsecured objec ts in the luggage compartment would be thrown forward with great force in the event of heavy braking, for exam ple. z Secure heav y objec ts with lashing straps 3 atta ched to lashing ey es – see page 86. If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is braked heavily or driven around a bend, the handling of the vehicle may chang e. z Saloon: loose objects in the lugg age com partment should be secured ag ainst slipping using a luggage net 3 – see pa ge 86. z Estate: when transporting objects in the lugga ge compa rtm ent, fit a safety net 3 – see page 84, or FlexO rganizer 3 – see pa ge 86. z Estate: close the luggage compa rtm ent cov er so there is no reflection in the rea r wind ow. 88 z Objects m ust not be stored in the a irb ag inflation area, because they could cause injury if the airbag inflates. z Do not drive with the luggage compartment op en, e.g. when tra nsporting bulky ob jects, since toxic ex haust gas could p enetrate the interior. z If objects are being transp orted in the luggage compa rtm ent, the rear sea t back rests m ust be locked in position – see page 82. z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e the upp er edge of the rear seat back rests, or above the upper ed ge of the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat back rests a re folded down. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3 must alway s b e freely a ccessib le. z Weights, payload and roof loa d – see page 262. z Driv ing with a roof load – see p ages 158, 161, 188, increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to cross-winds and has a detrimenta l effec t on vehicle handling owing to the vehicle’s higher centre of gravity. Disregarding the instructions can potentially lead to fatal injury. Vehicle passeng ers should be inform ed accordingly. Cigarette lighte r ) 3 Accessory socket 3 In front centre console. The soc ket in the centre console and the cigarette lighter socket can be used to connect electrical accessories. The sockets are ready for operation when the ignition is switched on. If the eng ine is not running the battery will be discharged. An a dditional accessory soc ket 3 can be found in the centre console b eneath the rear air vents and in the Travel Assistant 3. Press in cigarette lighter with ignition switched on. S witches off autom atically once the element is glowing. Pull out lighter. Estates have an additional accessory socket to the left in the luggag e compartment next to the lug gage compartment lig hting. Do not dam age the soc kets by using unsuitable plugs. The maximum power c onsumption of electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed 120 w atts. Do not connect any current-delivering acc essories, e.g. electrical charging devices or b atteries. Electrical ac cessories connected to the socket must c om ply with the electroma gnetic compa tib ility requirem ents laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise vehicle ma lfunctions m ay occur. Accessory sockets in the Trav el Assistant 3 – see page 74. 89 Ashtray To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish. Disreg ard c an lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle pa ssengers should be informed accordingly. Ashtray, front The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated . 90 To empty , grip b oth sides of the ashtray insert a nd pull upwards. Rear a sht ray 3 In the rear c entre console. The cover op ens when pressed a t the point indicated. To empty: open the ashtray, press the spring (arrow ) and pull out the ashtray. Glove com partm ent To open, pull hand le upwards. At the front of the opened cover there is a p en holder. Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 139. Stow age compartment in the roof lining 3 Stowage compartments in the luggage compartme nt To op en, press the point indic ated. To acc ess p ress d ow n bar and open the cover. The max imum permitted load on the stowage compa rtm ent is 0. 4 kg. The stowage compartment m ust be closed whilst driving. Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3 stowage – see page 204. S towing the spare w heel – see page 205. J ack and vehicle tools stowage – see page 208. 6 91 Estates hav e an a dditional stowage compartment in the luggage com partment floor. To open, pull the release lever and open the flap. 92 When op ening, ensure that the flap opens at the seam so that the entire floor cover is not raised . Drink holders , front 3 The drink hold ers can be found between the front seats in the centre c onsole: slide cover open. Sun visors Use the sun visor to protect from glare by pulling it down and swivelling it to the side. Drinks holders , rear 3 The d rinks holder can be found b eneath the centre seat: pressing front ed ge mov es drink holder out. 93 Safety systems Three-stage re straint system Comprising: z three-point seat belts, z belt tensioners at the front seats and the rea r outer seats, z airbag sy stems for driver, front passenger and outer rea r seats 3. The three stag es are a ctivated in sequence depending on the seriousness of the accident: z The automa tic seat belt locking devices prevent the belt strap from being pulled out and thus ensure that the v ehicle occupants are retained in their seats. z The front seat b elt buckles and outer rea r seats are pulled downwards. As a result, the seat belts are instanta neously tightened and the occupants are mad e aware of the deceleration of the v ehicle at a very ea rly sta ge. This reduc es the stress p laced on the body. z The airbag sy stems a re also triggered in the ev ent of serious accidents and form a safety cushion for the occupants. Depending on the severity of the accident, the front a irb ags inflate in two stages. 94 The airbag systems serve to supp lement the three-point seat belts and belt tensioners. The seat belts must therefore always be worn. Disregard of these instructions may lea d to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle p assengers should be informed accordingly. Be sure to rea d the a ccompanying desc ription of the child restraint system ! Seat belts Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that means also in urb an traffic and when you are a rear seat passenger. It can save y our life! Pregnant women m ust alwa ys wear a seat belt – see page 98. In the event of an accident, persons not wearing sea t belts enda ng er their fellow oc cup ants and themselves. Warning light X for the seat belt – see page 35. Sea t belts are desig ned to be used by only one person at a time. They are not suitable for a ny one under 12 years of age or 150 cm. For children up to 12 years of age we recommend the Vaux hall child restraint system – see page 110. Three-point seat belts The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retrac tors and locking d evices, allowing freedom of body mov ement although the spring-tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit. For seat position – see pages 69, 99. The belt has a " vehicle sensitive retra ctor" which is designed to lock during hea vy acc eleration or deceleration in any direction. 95 Belt tens ioners The front seat belt and outer rear seat systems are equipped with b elt tensioners. If a head-on or tail-end collision of a certa in severity occurs, the belt buckles are pulled downward and the shoulder and lap belts are tightened in an instant. Actuati on of belt tensioners is indicated by illum ina tion of control indica tor v, see next p age. The belt tensioners must be replaced after activation. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the seat belts are unda maged the op eration thereof is unaffected, even if the belt tensioners have been triggered. Further inform ation – see page 99. 96 C ont rol indic ator v for belt tensioners The belt tensioners are monitored electronically together with the a irb ag systems and their operational rea diness is indicated on the instrument panel by control ind icator v. When the ignition is switched on, the c ontrol indicator lights up for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not light up, does not go off after 4 seconds, or lights up while d riv ing, there is fault in the belt tensioner sy stem or the a irb ag system s – see page 105. The belt tensioners or airbag sy stems may fail to trigger in the event of an a ccident. Have the cause of the fault remedied . We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer. The system ’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. have Ca r Pass on hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The c ontrol indicators can also be located in the tac hometer d isplay dial – see page 37. Imp or tant z Accessories and other objects must not be affixed or placed within the action zone of the belt tensioners a s this may result in injury if the belt tensioners are triggered. z Do not mak e any modifications to the components of the belt tensioners, as this will render the vehicle unroadworthy. Imp roper handling (e. g. removal or installation) can activ ate the belt tensioners – risk of injury . z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem control electronics can be found in the centre console area. In order to av oid malfunctions, do not store mag netic objects in this a rea. z We recom mend that you have the front seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z The belt tensioners only actuate once. Please replace belt tensioners that have been triggered. We recom mend tha t you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Applicable safety directives must always be ob served when disposing of the vehicle. For this reason, d isposal should be performed by an authorised recycling company. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 97 Using the belts Fitting seat bel ts Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide it across the body , making certain that it is not twisted. Insert the la tch plate into the buckle. The front sea t b ackrest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not op erate properly . The recommended angle of inclina tion is 25° . Mak e sure that the lap belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly across the body. Tension the belt frequently while d riv ing by tugging the diagonal pa rt of the belt. 98 O n pregnant women in particular, the lap belt must be positioned as low as possible ac ross the pelv is so as not to put too much pressure on the abdomen. Bulk y clothing prevents the belt from fitting prop erly. The belt must not rest against ha rd or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys, spectacles) because these could cause injury. Do not place any objec ts (e.g. ha ndb ags, mobile phones) b etween the belt and your body. Height adjustm ent of seat belt upper anchora ge p oint: 1. Pull b elt out slig htly. 2. Front seat b elts: Press button down or slide belt guide up. Rear seat belts: Press belt guide and slide it upwards or downwards. 3. Set desired height. 4. Allow anchorage to lock aud ibly into position. Do not adjust height while driving . Testing the belts Plea se check all parts of the b elt system occasionally for dama ge a nd correct operation. H ave da maged parts replaced . In ca se of an accident, please replace overstretc hed belts and triggered belt tensioners. We recommend consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Do not perform any altera tions on the belts, their anchorages, the automatic retrac tors or the belt buck les. Mak e sure that b elts are not da maged or trapped by sharp-edged objec ts. Adjust height such that the belt p asses over the wearer’s shoulder and rests against the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck or upper arm. Rem oving t he b el t To remove the belt, d epress the red pushbutton on the buckle; the b elt will retract automatically. Three-point seat b el t on centre rear sea t The belt can only be pulled out of the retractor if the ba ck seat rests are engaged in their retainers – see page 82. 99 Exception: Passenger sea t with seat occupancy recognition system 3 . The seat occupancy recognition system deactiva tes the passenger front and side airbags if the passenger seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy recognition – see page 105. Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 – see page 110. Examples of events triggering the front airbag sy stem: Vauxhall Full-Size airbag s yste m The front airb ag system will be trigg ered : Front airb ag The front airbag system is identified by the word AI RBAG on the steering wheel and above the glov e c om partment. z depending on the severity of the accident, The front airbag system comprises: z an airbag with inflator in the steering wheel and a second one in the instrum ent panel, z the control elec tronics with impact sensor, z the a irb ag system s control indicator v in the instrument panel, z seat occupancy recognition 3 , z the control indica tor for Vauxhall child restraint sy stems y with transponders 3 in the instrument panel. 100 z depending on the type of impact, z within the range shown in the figure, z indep endent of side airbag a nd curta in airbag sy stem 3. z Impact against a non-y ielding obstacle: the front airbags are trigg ered at low vehicle speed. z Impact against a yield ing obstacle (such as another vehicle): the front airbags are only triggered at a hig her vehicle speed. When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the d riv er and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat occupants is c hecked, thereby sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to the upp er body and hea d. No im pairment of view will occur, because the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly . The front airbag sy stem provides optimum p rotection when the seat, back rest and head restra int are correctly adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the a rea of its upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms slightly bent. The front passenger’ s sea t should b e as far b ack as possible, w ith the back rest upright – see pa ges 5, 6, 69. Do not place the head, b od y, hands or feet on the covers of the airbag sy stems. The front airbag sy stem will not be triggered in the ev ent of: z the ignition being switched off, z minor frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a sid e or rear impac t, that is to say, if it w ould not be of benefit to the oc cup ants. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airb ags inflate. Im portant inform ation – see page 107. The three-point seat belt must be correctly fitted – see page 98. 101 Seat belts must therefore always be worn. The front airbag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you d o not wear your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an accident. In the event of an accident the belt helps to keep you in the correct seating position, so that the front airb ag system can provide you with effective protection. In addition, the front airb ag sy stem will not be triggered for the front passenger in versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 if: z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child restraint system with transponders 3 . Seat oc cup ancy recognition – see page 105. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see pa ge 110. Side airb ag 3 The side a irb ag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the front seat backrests. The side airbag sy stem will be triggered: The side a irb ag system c om prises: z within the range shown in the figure on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or front passenger side, z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat respectively , z the control electronics, z the side impact sensors, z the airbag systems control ind icator v in the instrum ent panel, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrum ent panel. 102 z depending on severity of the a ccident, z depending on the ty pe of im pact, z ind epend ently of the front airbag sy stem. Exception: Passenger sea t with seat occupancy recognition system 3. S eat occupancy recognition system deactiva tes the passenger front and side airbags if the passenger seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy recognition – see page 105. Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see pag e 110. There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the seat backs and the vehicle body . Do not place the hands or arms on the covers of the airba g systems. Imp ortant information – see page 107. The three-p oint seat b elt m ust always b e correctly fitted – see page 98. The side airba gs will not be triggered in the event of z the ig nition being sw itched off, z fronta l collisions, When the side a irb ag is triggered it inflates within milliseconds and provides a safety barrier for the driver and/or pa ssenger in the v icinity of the relevant front door. This red uces the risk of injury to the upper body considerably in case of a side impact. z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear impac t, z collisions involving a side imp act outside the passenger cell. C ur tain ai rbag 3 The curtain a irba g system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. The curtain a irba g system com prises In addition, the side airbag system w ill not be triggered for the front passenger in versions with seat occupa ncy recognition 3 if z an airbag w ith inflator in the roof frame on the d riv er’s and front passenger’s side respectively, z the front p assenger’s sea t is unoccupied, z the side im pact sensors, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restraint system with transpond ers 3. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 105. Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transp onders 3 – see p age 110. z the airbag sy stems control indicator v in the instrument panel. z the control electronics, 103 There m ust be no objec ts in the area in which the airbag inflates. Do not place the hands or arms on the covers of the airbag sy stems. Important information – see page 107. The three-point seat belt must alway s be correctly fitted – see pag e 98. The curtain airbags will not b e triggered in the event of z the ignition being switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, The curtain airbag system will be trigg ered z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the typ e of impa ct, z within the rang e shown in the figure on the centre door pillar of the d riv er’s or front passenger side, z together with the side airbag sy stem, z irrespective of seat occupancy recognition, z independently of the front airbag system . 104 When the curtain airbag is triggered it inflates w ithin milliseconds and provides a safety barrier in the hea d area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side impact. z collisions involving a rear impact, z collisions involving a side impact outside the passenger cell. Hav e the cause of the fa ult remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised R epairer. The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics allow s faults to be quickly remedied. have Car Pass on ha nd when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The control indica tors can a lso be located in the tachometer display dial – see page 37. Cont rol indica tor v for airb ag systems The front airbag system , the side airbag system 3 and the curtain airbag system 3 are monitored electronically together with seat occupancy recognition 3 and the belt tensioners. Their opera tional readiness is shown b y control ind icator v in the instrument panel. When the ignition is switched on, the control indic ator lights up for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not light up, d oes not go out after 4 seconds or lights up while driving, there is a fault in the airbag sy stems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or the belt tensioners – see page 96. The system s m ay fail to trigg er in the event of an accident. Seat occupancy recogniti on 3 The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front a nd side airbag s for the front passenger if the front passenger seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 is fitted on the front passenger seat. The curtain airb ag sy stem 3 remains activated . The control indicator for seat occupancy recognition is located in the instrument panel. If this control indicator lights up for app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is equip ped with seat oc cup anc y recog nition – see next pag e, Fig. 13068 J . If a Vaux ha ll child restraint system with transponders 3 is installed, this warning light remains on after the ignition has been switched on a s soon as the system ha s detected the seat. O nly then can the child restraint sy stem be used on the pa ssenger seat. 105 Vehicles with seat oc cup anc y recog nition can be identified by the stick er on the side of the instrum ent panel, which is visib le when the driver’s door is open. Vauxhall child restraint system s w ith transponders 3 are a utomatica lly detected if correctly fitted to the front pa ssenger sea t. When these child restraint system s are being used on the front passenger seat, the front a nd side airbag systems for the front passenger seat are deac tiv ated. The curtain airbag system rema ins activa ted. Pay attention to seat occupancy recognition 3 c ontrol indicator – see page 106. 106 O nly Vaux hall child restraint sy stems with tra nsponders 3 can be fitted on the front passenger seats. Use of sy stems without tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith tra nsponders 3 are identified by a sticker. Control i nd icator y for Vauxhal l child restra int systems w ith transponders 3 The presenc e of a Vauxhall c hild restraint sy stem with transponders 3 is ind ic ated after the ig nition has been switched on by permanent illum ination of the c ontrol indica tor y in the instrument panel, as soon as the sea t occupancy recognition sy stem has detected the child restraint sy stem. If the control indicator d oes not illuminate whilst driving, the front and side airbag have not been deactivated on the passenger side. Risk of fatal injury to the child – fit child restraint system to rear seat. Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. If a child restraint sy stem is incorrectly fitted or the transp onders are faulty the control indicator will flash. Chec k that child restraint system has been fitted correctly. Fitting child restraint system with transponders 3 – see p age 110. If the control indicator does not illuminate with a c orrectly insta lled child restraint system there is a fault - risk of fatal injury to the c hild. Fit child restra int system to rear seat. Have cause of fault rem edied. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If no Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is installed the control indicator must neither illuminate nor flash, since the passenger side airb ag systems would not actuate. have cause of fault rem edied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. If the Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted according to the instructions, the control indica tor for Vauxhall restraint systems with transponders must light up in the instrum ent panel when the ignition is switched on. If the control ind icator does not illuminate whilst d riv ing, the airba g system s hav e not been d eactivated on the p assenger side. R isk of fatal injury . I n this c ase, fit child restraint sy stem to rea r seat. Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We recommend tha t y ou c onsult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Imp or tant z Accessories and other objects must not be affix ed or placed in the area in w hich the airb ags inflate as they could cause injury if the a irba gs are triggered. z Do not place any objects between the airbag sy stems and the v ehicle occupants – risk of injury . z Use the hook s in the roof fram e only to hang up light articles of clothing or coat hangers. Do not p la ce any objects in the pockets of the hanging item s – risk of injury . z The airb ag systems and b elt tensioner control electronics can be found in the centre console area . In order to avoid malfunctions, d o not store magnetic objec ts in this area. z Do not stic k anything on the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat back rests or roof frame in the v icinity of the airb ags, or on the front passenger’s seat cushion, or cover any of those areas with other m aterials. z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to clean the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seat back rests, roof frame and sea t cushion of the front passeng er seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning agents. z Only protective covers which are approved for your vehicle with side airbag m ay be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective cov ers, make sure tha t the airbag units on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests are not covered. z The airbag sy stems are triggered ind epend ently of each other based on the severity of the ac cident and the type of impa ct. The side airbag sy stem 3 and the curtain airbag system 3 a re trig gered together. z Each airbag can be triggered only once. Once triggered, an airb ag must be replaced without delay . We recommend tha t you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z The speeds, directions of movement and deformation properties of the vehic les, and the p roperties of the obstacle conc erned, determ ine the severity of the accident and triggering of the airbags. The degree of dama ge to y our vehicle and the resulting repair costs alone are not indica tiv e that the criteria for trig gering of the airb ags were met. 6 107 z Do not p erform any a lterations on the com ponents of the airbag sy stem, as this would render the v ehicle unroa d-worthy . The systems can be triggered ab ruptly and cause injury if they are handled im properly. z We recom mend hav ing the steering wheel, the instrument p anel, all panelling parts, the door seals, the hand les and the seats rem ov ed by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z When disposing of the v ehicle, please ob serve the applicab le safety regulations. Please have the vehicle disposed of by a disposal compa ny . We recommend that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should only travel on the rear seats. This does not apply to children who are travelling in child restraint systems with transp onders 3. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy objec ts on the front passenger’ s seat otherwise the airbag system s for the front p assenger’s seat may b e triggered in the event of an accident. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions do not use protective cov ers or seat cushions on the front passeng er’s seat. z When using a Vaux hall child restraint system with transponders 3 on the front passenger’ s seat, in order to prevent malfunctions, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet, stick ers or heated mats) may be placed under the child restraint system. C hild restraint system s a s well as other hea vy objects must never be ca rried on the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury . If ca rried in this way, child restraint systems with transp onders 3 in vehicles with seat occupancy recog nition 3 could lead to front passenger airbag sy stems not being trig gered in the event of a n accident. 108 Use of child restra int systems 3 on t he front p assenger seat in v ehic les w ith ai rbag syst em s 3, but without seat occup ancy recog nition 3 Vehic les with passenger airba g and no side airbag 3: child seats facing the rea r of the vehicle m ust not be fitted to the passeng er seat, risk of fatal injury . Child seats fac ing the front (child safety seats for weight ranges I, I I and I II – see following pa ges) are permitted on the passeng er seat, providing that it is pushed back as fa r as possible and the backrest has been ad justed so that the lap belt fits snugly. A vehicle w ith front passenger a irba g can be identified by the word AI RBAG above the g lov e com partment and by the stick er on the pa ssenger sid e sun visor – see Fig. 12863 J. O n some vehicles 1 ) the warning sticker is loc ated on the side of the instrument panel – see Fig. 11704 A. Vehicles with side airbag 3 : No c hild restraint system 3 may be fitted on the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury . A vehicle with side a irba gs can be identified b y the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests. Sea t occupancy recognition 3 – see p age 105. 1) Use of child restra int systems 3 on fr ont pa ssenger sea t in vehicl es wi th airba g systems 3 and wi th sea t occupa nc y recognit ion 3 Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transpond ers 3 ca n be fitted on the front passenger seats. Use of systems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Co untry-specific versio n. 109 Child res traint sys te ms 3 The Vauxhall c hild restraint system is designed specifically for your vehicle and thus provides op tim um safety for your child in the event of impact. If a different child safety seat is used, follow the ma nufacturers’ instructions for fitting and use. Seat occupancy recognition in a vehicle is indicated by the control indica tor in the courtesy light. I f this control indicator lig hts for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on, it indica tes that the v ehicle is equipp ed with seat occupancy rec ognition – see pa ge 105. Seat occupancy recognition in a vehicle is also indicated by a sticker on the side of the instrum ent panel, visible when the driver’s door is open – see previous page, Fig. 12106 A. The seat occupancy recognition system detects Vaux hall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 and switches off the front a nd side airbag systems for the front passenger’s sea t. The curtain airbag system rem ains activated. Seat occ upa ncy recognition – see pa ge 105. 110 Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith tra nsponders 3 can be identified by the sticker on the child restraint system. Selecti ng the right syst em Y our child should be transported facing bac kwards in the car as long a s possible. It is appropriate to change the system when the child’ s head can no longer be properly supported a t eye heig ht. The child’s cervical vertebrae are still v ery weak and in an ac cident they suffer less stress in the sem i-p rone backwards position than when sitting up right. Permissible opti ons for fi tting a child safety sea t Weight and age cl ass 0: up to 10 kg or approx. 10 months 0+: up to 13 kg or approx. 2 years Fr ont passeng er seat B 1, + O uter rea r seat s U+ Centre rear seat U B 2 = p rov id ed: no side airbag, if the front passenger seat is slid all the wa y bac k and seat height 3 is set to its highest position, or with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child safety systems with transponders U = universally suitable in conjunction with three-point seat belt B 1, + U+ U B 2, + U+ U II : 15 t o 25 kg or approx. 3 to 7 years B2 U U II I: 22 t o 36 kg or approx. 6 to 12 y ears B2 U U I: 9 to 18 k g or approx. 8 months to 4 years B 1 = p rov id ed: only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child safety systems with transponders + = sea t with ISO -FI X m ounting ava ila ble; only child safety system s app rov ed for the vehicle may be used 111 Vauxha ll safety c radle wi thout tra nspond er From birth up to a weight of 10 k g. Va uxhall sa fety crad le with t ransponders From b irth up to a weig ht of 10 kg. The transponders a re integ ra ted in the seat cushion. Vauxhall Top S afe child safety seat w ith or wi thout ISO -FIX securing , w ith transponders From birth up to a w eight of 18 kg. The tra nsponders are integrated in the seat console. C om prising: 1 Child seat, 2 Carrying c ra dle 3 , 3 Floor sup port 3, 4 Seat belt 3, 5 Safety supp ort. 112 Note z C hildren under 12 y ears or under 150 cm tall should only travel in an appropriate child safety seat. z When transporting children, use the child restraint systems suitable for the child’s weight. z Ensure that the child restraint sy stem is fitted correctly. z Only a llow the child to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing away from the road. z A child restraint sy stem which has been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. z You should also ob serve the instructions on installa tion and use supplied with the child restraint sy stem. z The cov ers of the safety cradle and safety seat can be wiped clean. Vauxhall child safety seat wit hout transponder From 9 kg1 ) to 36 k g. z Do not stic k anything on the child restraint sy stems a nd do not cover them with any other materia ls. Com prising: 1 Seat backrest, 2 Safety support, 3 Seat cushion. 1) Use of th e s ys tem is n ot recomm ended fo r children weig hing less tha n 11 kg. 113 The m irrors do not dip to prev ent dazzle if: z the ignition is switched off, z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights are on, z a door is open. Adjusting interior a nd ex terior mirrors – see page 8. Automatically regulated centre console lighting – see pa ge 118. Exterior mirrors For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting p osition if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by apply ing slight pressure to the mirror housing. Asphe rical exterior mirror 3 increases the field of view. Estim ating the distance aw ay of vehicles follow ing you is only possible to a limited extent because of slig ht distortion. 114 Automatic anti-daz zle interior mirror 3 and e xte rior mirror 3 on the driver’s side Dazzle at night is automa tic ally red uc ed. For vehicles with position m emory for electrica lly operated front seats 3 the sensor is in the top right-hand side of the mirror. Head restraints Safety access ories 3 Do not attach objec ts or com ponents that are not approved for your vehicle to the head restraints. These affec t the protective effect of the head restraints and can be propelled through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner if the driver brakes hard or an a ccident occurs. The wide range of Vauxhall a ccessories allow s y ou to equip y our vehicle in accordance with your own wishes. In addition to safety acc essories, items for improving comfort and a complete range of v ehicle care products y ou will find many artic les which will be of great value to y ou when needed . "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" guarantee high qua lity a nd an accurate fit. A Vaux hall Authorised Repairer w ill be ha ppy to ad vise you, for exam ple w ith regard to: z Vauxhall child restraint sy stems, z Tow ropes, z Tow rods, z Jump lead s, z Sp are bulb kit, z Sp are fuse kit, z Halogen fog lights, z Mudflaps, z Magnetic light, z Warning tria ngle, z First-aid k it, z First-aid k it (cushion). 115 Lighting Exte rior lights Front fog lights > 3 Turn light switch: On = O ff = 7 = O ff 8 = Parking lights 9 = Dipp ed or m ain beam Dip ped beam , main b eam and head lig ht flash – see p ages 16, 17. In positions 8 a nd 9, the tail lights and numb er plate lights are also lit. Vehicles with daytime running lig hts 3: With the ignition on and the light switch on 7, d ip ped beam without instrum ent illumination is on. Driv ing abroad – see page 119. Turn signal lights, hazard warning lights , parking lights, door-to-door lighting see p ages 16, 17. 116 Press > Press > again or switch ignition off C ontrol indicator > in instrument panel. Fog tail light r On = O ff = Press r Press r again or switch ignition off C ontrol indicator r in instrument panel. The fog tail lights on the vehicle are deactivated when towing a caravan / trailer. Instrument illum ination k, Inform ation display illum ination Brightness c an be adjusted when the exterior lights are on: Push to release the knob and then turn it cloc kwise or anticlockwise and hold until the desired brightness is obtained. Headlight range adjustm ent ? Manual hea dlight range adjustm ent 3 With dipped bea m switched on, adjust head lig ht range in four steps to suit vehicle load. Turn wheel aga inst resistanc e and click it to the req uired position. Correct adjustment of the headlight range red uces dazzle for other road users. Autom atic Level Control Sy stem – see page 179. Vehicles without headlight range adjustment z Front sea ts occupied = 0 z All seats occupied = 1 z All seats occupied and luggage compa rtm ent = 2 z Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compa rtm ent = 3 Autom atic headli ght range adj ustm ent 3 C ontrols the hea dlight rang e in v ehicles with x enon headlight systems. If the control indicator q illum ina tes in the tachometer dial display whilst driv ing , a fault has occurred. Have cause of fault remed ied imm ediately. We recomm end that y ou consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer. Vehicles with headlight range adjustm ent z Front sea ts occupied = 0 z All seats occupied = 0 z All seats occupied and luggage compa rtm ent load = 0 z Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compa rtm ent load = 1 117 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 O n vehicles w ith Bi-Xenon headlights, improves illumination of z curv es (curv e lighting), z intersections and tight turns (turn lig hting). Curv e lighting The Xenon light beam p ivots b ased on steering wheel position and speed (from approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h). The headlights shine a t an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. Turn light ing An a dditional light is switched on based on steering wheel position (when turned p ast approx. 90°), turn signal use and speed (up to approx. 25 mph / 40 km /h). The light shines at an angle from approx. 90° to the left or right of the vehicle up to a distance of ap prox . 30 metres. Reversing lights Com e on when reverse gear is engaged and ignition is switched on. Front courtesy light Front reading lights 3 When the door is c losed , the courtesy light switches off after a slight delay . Reading lights at left and right indiv idually operable. With ignition turned on: Courtesy light when doors are closed: On = O ff = On = Off = Press button b Press button b again The courtesy light can b e deactivated 3 using button c. Automatically regulated centre cons ole lighting 3 Spotlight in housing of interior mirror. Daylight-dependent, automa tic ally regulated centre console lig hting with ignition switched on. 118 Press button a Press button a again Glove compartment lighting Do as follows to prevent glare: Glov e compartm ent is illuminated when lid is open and ignition on. Vehicles without Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3 Place covers on both hea dlights. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. Illum inated m irror in the sun visors 3 The lighting sw itches on when the cov er is op ened . Cigarette lighter and ashtray illum ination 3 Lights up when ignition is switched on. Luggage com partm ent lighting 3 Comes on when the boot lid / tailgate is op ened . Courtes y lights and re ar reading lights 3 On = Switch setting 1 Light comes on when a door is opened = Centre switch setting O ff = Switch setting 0 Safeguarding the battery To prevent the ba ttery from b ecoming discharged, the courtesy light, reading lig hts, luggag e com partment lighting and glove com partment lighting switch off autom atic ally 20 minutes after the ignition is switched off. Vehicles with Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3 1. Open and remove the cover of the fuseb ox in the engine comp artm ent – see page 216. 2. Fit fuse (ma xi-fuse) 3 (with designation "Transport") in slot 38. Fuse positions – see page 214. 3. Switch on ignition. After the conversion, the AFL control indicator lights for 4 second s each time the ignition is switched on. C ontrol indicator – see pa ge 36. He adlights when driving abroad The asymm etrical dipped b eam increases the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of the lane. This c auses glare for oncoming tra ffic if the vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on the opp osite side of the road. 119 Windows, sun roof Electric windows 3 The electric windows can be used z with ignition on, z within 10 m inutes of switching ignition off, z within 10 m inutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 m inutes of inserting or rem oving the ignition key. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is lock ed. Care must b e taken when operating the electric windows 3 and electric sun roof 3 . There is a risk of injury, particularly for children, and a danger that articles could become trapped. Vehicle passengers should be informed according ly . If there are children on the rea r seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the electric windows. Keep a close wa tch on the windows and sun roof w hen closing them . Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they m ov e. 120 Two rocker buttons. O peration via 2 rock er buttons in the driver’ s door. Additional rocker buttons located in the front passenger door and the rear doors 3. To operate window in stages, tap switch. For autom atic opening or closing, keep switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop window m ovement, tap switch ag ain. Autom atic closing 3 If the rain sensor 3 detects water with the mechanical anti-theft locking system activa ted, all electronic wind ow s a re closed. The windows are also automatically closed after four hours. I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly Automatic opening and closing of the windows is not possible after interruption of the power supply or a drop in battery voltage. Ac tiv ate the w indow electronics as follows: 1. Close doors. 2. Switch on ignition. Vehicles with rea r 3 electric windows have a slide switch b etween the switches in the driver’s door: z Up: The front windows can be opera ted using the b uttons, z Down: The rear windows can be op erated using the buttons. Child sa fety system for r ear window s 3 Switch z in the driver’s door z Press (switch z lit red): Buttons in the rea r doors inopera ble. 3. Open windows completely. 4. Close window and press on button for at least 3 seconds. 5. Repeat for ea ch window. z Press again (switch z no longer lit red): Buttons in the rear doors operab le. Protectiv e func tion If the window glass encounters resistance above the middle of the window during automatic closing , it is immediately stop ped and the window op ened again. If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on account of frost), keep pressing the switc h for the window in question until the window has been closed in stages. 121 O per ating w indows from outside The w indows can be opened and closed using the radio frequency remote control. To open: Press button q until windows are open – or – Hold k ey in driver’s door lock in the door locking position until windows are open. To close: Press button p until windows are closed – or – Hold key in driver’s door lock in the door lock ing position until wind ow s a re closed. Overloa d If the system is ov erloaded, the power supply is automa tic ally cut off for a short tim e. The system is protected b y fuses in the fusebox – see pag e 212. 122 Rear windows C an be operated using the window winder 3. z within 10 minutes of switching ignition off, To rai se Turn the rotary switch to any position between d and e. The sun roof will automatically move to the desired position. When the switch is in position e, the sun roof is fully raised. z within 10 minutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, To low er Turn rota ry switch to d. z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition k ey. Position m em ory After the ig nition has b een switc hed on, the sun roof ca n be a utomatica lly returned to its last position by briefly p ressing the rotary switch. Sun roof 3 The electric sun roof can be operated z with ig nition on, Readiness for operation stops when the vehic le is locked. Operated using the rotary switch b etween the sun v isors. To op en: Turn the rotary switc h to any position between d and ü . The sun roof will autom atic ally m ov e to the d esired position. When the switch is in position ü, the sun roof is fully opened. Comfort position Set rotary sw itc h to position f. With the roof in this position, wind noise is reduced. To close: Turn rotary switch to d. 123 Protectiv e func tion If the sun roof encounters resistance during automatic closing , it is immediately stop ped and opened again, a s long as the vehic le is stationary. I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly After interruption of the power supply or a drop in battery voltage the desired sun roof position is no longer set a utoma tica lly . The electronics of the sun roof must be reprog ra mmed as follows: If, when the vehicle is being driven, the sun roof encounters resistance during automa tic closing, because of the higher closing forces involved the p rotective function cannot be g uara nteed, and there is a risk of injury. If the sun roof movement is stiff, e.g. due to frost, turn rotary switch to d and keep it pressed until the sun roof is closed. Autom atic c losi ng 3 If the rain sensor 3 detects water w ith the mechanic al anti-theft locking system activated, the sun roof is closed. The sun roof is also automatically closed after four hours. Sun shade The sun shad e can be opened and closed with the sun roof either closed or raised. When the sun roof is opened, the sun shad e is also op ened. 124 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Press the rota ry switch until the sun roof is shut, then keep it pressed for at lea st a further 3 seconds. 3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it depressed until the sun roof is open. 4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sun roof is closed. Closing sun roof from out si de Closing sun roof using radio frequency remote control: press p button and hold until sun roof is closed, – or – Turn key in d riv er’s side door lock to rear and hold until sun roof has closed. If the windows are to be closed from outside the vehicle, but the sun roof is to be left open, briefly press the rotary switch before switching off the ignition. 5. Turn rotary switch to e a nd leave there until the sun roof is fully extended. 6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sun roof is closed. O verload If the sy stem is overload ed, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time. Fault Roller blinds at re ar side windows 3 If the electric drive fails, the system is protected by a fuse in the fuseb ox see page 212. Until the fault is remed ied, opera te the sun roof as follows: Pull the blind upwards using the grip and engage it at the top in the d oor frame. Disengage drive cover with a screwdriv er and remove. Take Allen key from drive cover, insert in sun roof d riv e and turn until sun roof is closed. Electrically operated rear window blind 3 Reduces intensity of sunlight shining on to rear seats. O perational with ignition switched on. To raise To lower = = Press N Press N again Do not opera te blind if there are objects lying in front of the rear window. 125 Climate control Dep ending on how the v ehicle is equipped , the c lim ate w ill be controlled by a heating and v entilation system with optiona l air conditioning system 3 or by an electronic air conditioning sy stem 3. He ating and ventilation system with optional air conditioning system 3 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re combined into one unit that is d esigned to prov ide com fort regardless of the season, weather or outside temperature. When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried. The heating unit heats the air a s required in all operating m od es depending on the position of the temperature switch. The air supply can be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan. The version without air conditioning sy stem 3 d oes not hav e b uttons for cooling n, air rec irculation 4 or demisting and defrosting V. 126 Electronic air conditioning system 3 The electronic air conditioning system provides maxim um comfort under any weather conditions, at any outside temperature and at a ll tim es of the y ear. To ensure a constant and com fortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the air distribution are changed a utomatically acc ording to clim atic conditions outside the vehicle. S ettings are shown on the inform ation display. Electronic air conditioning system – see pag e 134. Heate r controls Left -hand rota ry swit ch: Air d istributi on L to head area ab ov e ad justable air vents and to footwell M to headroom via adjustable air vents l to the windscreen and front door windows J to the windscreen, front d oor wind ow s to footwell K to footwell Centre rotary switch: Tem perature red z one = warm blue zone = cold Rig ht-hand rot ary swi tch: Air flow Four fan speeds: x O ff 4 Max imum air flow The ra te of air flow is determined by the fan. The fan should therefore also be switched on d uring a journey . O pen the air vents when the switch is set to L or M. 127 Heate d re ar window, heated exterior mirrors 3 O peration with ignition switched on: On = O ff = Press Ü Press Ü again Control indicator in pushbutton. Heating operational only with engine running. The heating is switched off autom atically after approx. 15 minutes. Air conditioning system 3 Cooling n Button n is used to a ctivate the cooling sy stem (cooling compressor) in the air conditioning system (control indicator). The cooling system (cooling c om pressor) is only operational when the engine is running. When the c ooling unit (cooling comp ressor) is on, the air is cooled and dehumidified. Switch off the cooling to conserve fuel whenev er cooling or drying is not req uired. At low outside temp eratures the c ooling unit (cooling compressor) switches off autom atic ally. 128 Air rec irculati on system 4 Air recirc ulation button 4 is used to switch the air conditioning system to a ir recirc ulation mode (control indica tor). If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate from outside: temporarily switch on air recirc ulation system 4. The air recirculation sy stem minimises the entry of outside air. The humidity increa ses, and the w indows can mist up. The quality of the pa ssenger com partment air d eteriorates w hich m ay ca use the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. Air distribution to l: air rec irculation system is a utomatically switched off to speed up d emisting of windows. Centre and side air vents (1) Pleasant ventilation to the head area controlled by the position of the tem perature switch. To open air vents: Turn vertica l adjuster wheel upwards. The air flow can be direc ted a s desired by adjusting the horiz ontal and v ertical adjustm ent wheels. To close the v ents turn the adjustment wheel fully downwards. To increase the air supply , set the fan to a higher sp eed and set the air distribution switch to M. Windscre en defroster nozzles (2 ) Air distribution switch to l or J: a ir flows onto windscreen and side wind ow s. Additional vents Located in front of the wind screen, in front of the door windows and in the footwells. Rear air vents 3 The air flow can be adjusted using the adjuster wheel. Turn adjuster wheel upwards: Vents will be fully opened. To close the vents turn the vertical adjustment wheel fully d ow nwa rd s. The air flow can be directed as desired by tilting and swivelling the slats. To increase the air supply, set the fan to a higher speed and set the air distribution switch to M. 129 Heate d front seats 3 He ated rear seats 3 Driver’s se at with climate control 3 Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air vent for the left a nd right-hand seats. Tw o pushbuttons at rear of centre c onsole in front of the rear seats. K nurled wheel at driver’s side below centre air v ents. Turn relevant wheel to set required heating lev el. After switching ignition on, press ß button again to heat outboard seats. Move knurled wheel to required ventilation or hea ting setting as per requirements. Control indica tor above adjustm ent wheel. To switch off, set wheel to 0. On Off Heating only with ignition switched on. Control indica tors in pushbuttons. 130 = = Press ß Press ß again C ontrol ind icator ab ov e adjustm ent wheel. To switch off, set wheel to 0. Function only av ailable with ignition switched on. He ating The amount of heat is dependent on the engine temperature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. For rapid warming of the p assenger compartment: z Set the air distribution sw itch to the desired position – see page 127. z Set the temperature switch in the red zone. z Set the fan to speed 3. Ve ntilation z For max imum ventilation in head area: set air distribution switch to M and open all vents. z For ventila tion to footwell: set air distribution switch to K . z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d area and the footwell: set air distrib ution switch to L . The comfort and general well-b eing of the vehicle occupants a re to a large extent dependent on a suitable ventilation and heating setting. To obtain a stratification of temperature in the vehicle with the pleasant effect "cool head a nd warm feet", set the air distribution switch to K or L and the temperature switch to the m id position, and open the centre air vents. Heating the footwe ll z Set air distribution switch to K. z Set the temperature switch in the red zone. z Switch on fan. z Set the tem perature to the desired setting. z Set the fan to the d esired setting. 131 Window de misting and de frosting Disreg ard of the settings described can cause the windows to become m isted up which c an lead to accidents due to lack of p roper vision. Operation of the s yste m 3 Comfort sett ing z C ooling n a s required. z Air rec irculation system 4 off. z Set air distribution switch to M or L. Ma xim um cooling O pen w indows and sun roof 3 briefly so that warm air can esca pe rap idly. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution switch to M. z Move a ir distribution sw itch to l. z Tem perature switch: as required. z Turn the temperature switch as far into the red zone as possib le. z Turn the temp erature switch as far into the blue zone (cold) as possible. z Fan: as req uired. z Set fa n to 4. z O pen v ents as required. z Open all vents. Temperature switch in centre of adjustment range: warmer air will flow into the footwell and cooler air into the upper zone, with warm er air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the c entre vents. The sy stem will switch automatically to recirc ulation mode. z Set fan to 3 or 4. z Open side air v ents as required and direct them towards door windows. z Switch on heated rea r window. For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set air d istribution switch to J . 132 Note see page 143. Mainte nance see page 143. Window dem isting Wind ow m isting because of wet weather or dam p clothing: z Cooling n on. z Press button V: The fan will automa tic ally switch to 4, air distribution directed on to the windscreen. z Set temperature switch as per requirements. To switch off, press button V again; the air conditioning will op erate a t the settings selected p reviously . Disreg ard of the settings described can cause the windows to become m isted up which c an lead to accidents due to lack of p roper vision. De-ic ing the wind ow s z C ooling n off, z Press button V: The fan w ill automatically switch to 4, air distribution directed on to the windsc reen. z Set temperature switch a s p er req uirements. Operation with cooling (cooling compressor) is not possible at low outsid e temperatures. To switch off, press button V aga in; the air c onditioning w ill operate at the settings selected previously. Disregard of the settings described can cause the windows to bec om e misted up which can lead to ac cidents due to la ck of proper vision. 133 Ele ctronic air conditioning system 3 The system provides m aximum com fort in any w eather, at any outside temperature and during any season. To ensure a constant and com fortable climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate a nd the air distrib ution are cha nged automatically according to clim atic conditions outside the v ehicle. The a ir is a utomatica lly regulated in accordance with the settings personally selected for the driver and pa ssenger sides. Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are automatically compensated. Manua l settings e. g. operating w ithout cooling and a ir distrib ution c an be selected using the menu – see p age 136. When the c ooling unit (cooling comp ressor) is on, the air is cooled and dehumidified. Settings are shown on the information display . The display can v ary according to the ty pe of presentation – see page 41. The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen and spores from the inflowing outside air. The autom atic air rec irculation system 3 has an air quality sensor 3 to detect harmful a mbient gases, in which case it will switch automatically to recirculation. When set to automa tic mode, the electronic air c onditioning system prov ides the op tim um settings under almost all conditions. If necessary , the system can be influenced manually. The electronic air conditioning system is only fully operational when the engine is running. At low outsid e temperatures the cooling unit (cooling com pressor) switches off automatically. 134 The temperature c an be set higher or lower as desired. Different tem peratures can b e set for the driver a nd passeng er sides. Operation without cooling (EC O appears in the display) m ay imp air the level of comfort – see page 137. All air vents (ex cept the rea r air vents 3 ) are controlled automa tic ally in automatic mode. The front air vents should therefore always be open. Autom atic m ode Autom atic air cir culation m ode 3 Air recirculation is automatically activated as soon as the system d etec ts harmful gases in the outside air. The circuit is controlled by an air q uality sensor. At low outsid e temperatures and with the cooling (cooling compressor) switched off, automatic recirculation operation will be disabled. This prevents the windows from misting up. S witch manually to air recirc ulation as nec essary . Sw itching automatic recirculation on or off – see page 138. Manual recircula tion operation – see pag e 139. Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Press AUTO button. z Open all front a ir vents. If d esired, the rear vents a lso 3 . z Set the pre-selected tempera ture for the driv er and pa ssenger sides to 22 °C using the rotary knobs. 135 Temperature Using the outer k nobs, temperatures can be set to va lues between 16 °C and 28 °C. For reasons of comfort, tempera ture can only be changed in sm all increments. If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo appears in the display: the electronic air conditioning system runs consta ntly at max imum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated . If a temperature ab ov e 28 °C is set, Hi appears in the display: the electronic air conditioning system runs consta ntly at max imum heating power. The temp erature is not regulated . Tem perature settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. Common tempera ture setting Press the knob for the driver’s sid e. The temperature on both the driv er and passenger side together can be set using the knob on the driver’s side. Manual settings Individual tem perature settings Press the knob for the passenger side. Temperatures can be set independently of each other using the k nobs for the driver and passenger sides. Electronic air conditioning settings can b e changed using the central rota ry knob , the buttons a nd using menus shown in the display. Calling up the menus: The tem perature on both the driver and passenger side are shown in the display. For reasons of comfort, the tempera tures cannot d iffer by m ore than 2 °C . 136 Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced-up or misted-up w indows), the functions of the electronic air conditioning system can be influenced manually. Press the centre knob, and the m enu for ma nual a djustments to the electronic air conditioning sy stem will app ear on the display. Individual m enu item s a re selected by turning the central knob and deselected b y pressing it. For some menu items a submenu will appear as soon as the resp ective menu has been deselected by pressing. Ea ch menu can be exited by selecting Bac k and pressing the central rotary k nob. Manual settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. Wi nd ow demi st ing and d e-i cing Disregard of the settings described can cause the windows to bec om e misted up which can lead to ac cidents due to la ck of proper vision. Press button V, Def ap pears in display, control indicator in button illum inates. The tem perature and the a ir distribution are adjusted autom atically, the fan runs at a faster sp eed and the windows are rapidly cleared of ice and moisture. The air flow can be increased or decreased by turning the centra l knob. Act ivat ing and d ea ctiv ating c ool ing S witc h off the cooling (cooling compressor) to c onserve fuel whenever cooling or drying is not needed. In the m enu for manual settings, highlight menu item AC a nd press to select. ECO appears in the display. Inflowing air is neither c ooled nor dehum idified. This restricts the lev el of comfort provided by the electronic air conditioning sy stem. This may cause the windows to mist up, for example. To activate cooling: I n the m anua l settings menu, selec t menu item AC and press to activa te cooling. To return to automa tic m ode: press button V or AUTO . Aux iliary heating 3 – see pag e 140. 137 Air d istributi on In the menu for manual settings, select item Air Distr ibution. Display of air d istribution m enus: s Air distrib ution to windscreen and to front sid e windows M Air distrib ution to vehicle occupants through a djustable air vents front and rear K Air distrib ution to footwell Display of selected air distribution by means of sym bols in display . Reverting to automatic a ir distribution: Select menu item Auto or press the AUTO button. 138 Air flow Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or anticlock wise (if no menu for manual settings is displayed). The selected fan level is ind icated by x and numb ers in the display . Sw itching automa tic recirc ul ation 3 on or off The automatic air recircula tion system has an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will switch automatically to recirculation. At speed 0 both the fan and the cooling (the cooling compressor) a re switched off. In the manual settings menu, select menu item Air Q uality Sensor a nd switch it on or off by pressing. To return to a utoma tic mode: Press A UTO button. S witc h to manual air rec irculation as nec essary . Manual air recirc ulation m ode The a ir recirculation sy stem prevents the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger com partment is circulated . Press button 4 , the c ontrol indicator in the b utton will light up. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger com partment a ir deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. I n op eration without c ooling the a ir humid ity increases, so the wind ow s may mist up. C onseq uently , m anual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirc ulation: Press button 4 again, the control indicator in the b utton will go out. Air conditioning with the engine not running When the vehicle is stop ped and the ignition off, the heat or cooling power still in the sy stem can b e used to condition the passenger compa rtm ent, for example when stop ped at a level crossing. Cooled glove compartm ent 3 C ooled air is fed into the glove compa rtm ent through an opening. If g lov e com partment cooling is not needed, turn the wheel d ow nwa rd s. Press button AUTO with the ignition off. Resid ua l Air C onditioning On will ap pear on the display. The air conditioning will operate for a lim ited p eriod of time. If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also autom atic ally switches on. O bserve notes on p age 140. To cancel a ir conditioning, press the AUTO button. 139 Auxiliary heating / ventilation 3 If the engine is switched off, the interior is heated or ventilated d epending on the values that hav e been set and the interior tem perature. Di rec t act ivat ion To activa te directly with ignition on, call up the manual settings menu a nd select item Auxili ary H eat ing then select menu item On. The regulation is in ac corda nc e with the most recent temp erature settings in the electronic air conditioning – see pag e 136. When the system is switched on, the tem perature setting can be varied using the outer rotary knobs. When the system is ac tiv ated, the control indica tor in the button AUTO will lig ht up. The a ir is led to the windscreen and the front side windows if the V button is pressed before switching the ignition off. To switch off sooner, press AUTO button or select m enu item Auxil iary Hea ting and then re-select menu item O n. Do not sw itc h auxiliary heater on in filling stations or closed sp aces – risk of fire or injury. 140 The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depend ing on the values that hav e been set and the interior temperature. Sw itching on at a p rogram med tim e Three p rogram med times can be stored for switching on. For safety reasons only one p rogram med time for sw itc hing on ca n be a ctiv e a t any one tim e. After the heating cyc le has been completed, the next required time for switching on must b e ac tiv ated afresh. To store a p rogram med time for switching on, ca ll up the menu for manual settings and select item Auxiliary Heating . After the m enu item Auxilia ry Heating the current status w ill be shown. To set a time, select menu item Setting . Then select menu item S tart 1, Start 2 or Sta rt 3 and set the req uired time. Then select menu item C onfi rm. Select the required tim e for programm ed switching on. When the system is ac tiv ated, the control indica tor in the button AUTO will lig ht up. The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depend ing on the values that hav e been set and the interior temperature. To cancel a ir conditioning, press the AUTO button. The menu for a ux ilia ry heating c an be called up within 2 hours of switching the ignition off, by pressing on the central rotary knob, and settings entered. Remot e cont rol The sy stem can also be switched on and off using the rem ote control: On = Press b utton b, the control ind ic ator in the rem ote control unit will lig ht up O ff = Press b utton § , the control ind ic ator in the rem ote control unit will lig ht up Whilst the control indicator is lit up, no further signa l can be sent. When the sy stem is activated, the control indicator in the button AUTO will light up. 6 141 The remote control has a range of approx. 600 m. The range can be reduc ed b y obstructions between the sender a nd receiver (e. g. walls) and by low power in the battery. The sy stem switches itself off autom atically after a max imum of 60 minutes dep ending on the v alues tha t have been set and the interior tem perature. The a ux ilia ry heating c an be switched off at any time by pressing the button § . Dea ctivating an activa ted switch-on tim e: 1. Press button §. 2. Delay of at least 3 seconds. 3. Press button § a gain. If required, up to three additional remote control units can be programm ed. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Changing the rem ote control ba ttery Replace the battery immediately if the ra ng e of the remote control starts to become reduc ed. Insert a pointed ob ject into the opening in the underside of the rem ote c ontrol and flip op en the cover. Replace batteries ob serving installation position. For ba ttery type – see page 275. Alw ays exc hange all batteries a t the sam e tim e. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with environmental protection regulations. 142 Air intake The air intakes in front of the windscreen on the fa r right and left sides of the engine compa rtm ent must be kep t clear to allow air inta ke. Remove any leav es, dirt or snow. Air outlet Do not cover the air outlets when storing items in the luggag e compartment storag e compa rtm ents. Pollen filter The p ollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen and spores from the air entering from outside. The active carbon layer 3 elim inates most od ours and harmful amb ient gases from the air. The filter must b e replaced in accordance with the interv als specified in the Service Booklet. Note If the windscreen is misted due to da mp weather, temporarily set the system a s described under "Window demisting". Cooling 3 functions most effic iently when the w indows and sun roof 3 are closed. I f the p assenger compartment has heated up consid erably after a long period in direc t sunlight, briefly open the windows and sun roof 3 so that the hot air can escape quickly . When cooling 3 (air c onditioning compressor) is switched on condensation forms, which is ex pelled from the underside of the v ehicle. When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched on there m ay briefly be som e smoke and noise. When the auxiliary heating / auxiliary ventilation 3 is switched on the anti-theft alarm system monitoring of the vehicle interior 3 is dea ctivated. Aux iliary hea ting 3 consumes fuel (approx. 0.3 litres p er hea ting proc ess on a verage). Aux iliary heating 3 will only switch on if coolant temperature is less tha n approx. 80 °C . Mainte nance In order to ensure consistently efficient performa nc e, the cooling system 3 must be switched on for a few m inutes once a month regardless of the weather or season. O peration with cooling 3 (cooling compressor) is not possible a t low outside temperatures. Aux ilia ry heating 3 should be run for a few minutes every 6 months at a pre-selected temperature over 22 ° C. In the event of a fault, consult a workshop . We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In order to im prov e heating power and ensure that the engine operating temperature is rea ched quickly , auxiliary heating 3 also switches on automatically when driving if the outside temp erature is less than ap prox . 8 °C . This occurs irresp ective of stored auxiliary heating switch-on tim es. Aux iliary heating switches itself off automatically when the engine is switched off, while the combustion air fa n continues running for ap prox . 2 minutes (humming noise). At lea st one air vent must b e open while cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is on in order to prevent the evaporator from icing up due to lack of air movement. 143 Automatic transmission 3 The automatic transmission allows you to cha ng e gears autom atically (autom atic mode) or manually (m anual mod e). Selecting D puts the transmission in autom atic mode. If the selector lever is moved to the left in the D position, ma nual mode is ac tiv ated, and the gears can be selected manually by tapp ing the selector lever forw ard or back ward. After sta rting the engine and before shifting into a gea r, depress the brake pedal, If the brakes are released w hen a gear is engaged , the v ehicle will "creep". Nev er ac tuate accelerator and b rake pedals simultaneously . Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. 144 Selector lever in P , R, N and D (Automatic mode) P Park. Front wheels loc ked. O nly with vehic le stationa ry and handbrake on. R Reverse. O nly engage when vehicle stationary. N N eutral. D Drive position for normal driving conditions in first to fifth gear. If the engine speed is too slow, the transmission automatically shifts to a lower gear. Increased engine speed will not result in an automatic upshift to a higher gear. For reasons of safety , K ic kdown also functions in manual mode – see page 147. The selected gear is ind ic ated in the transmission displa y. The selector lever ca n only b e moved out of P or N when the ig nition is switched on and the foot brak e is depressed (selector lever lock). In positions P or N the control indica tor j in the selector lever indica tor strip will light up red – see figure. The engine can only be started with lever in position P or N. When position N is selected, press foot brake or engage handbrake before sta rting. Se lector leve r in + or Active Se lect (Manual mode) + - Shift to a higher gear Shift to a lower gear If a higher g ear is selected when the running speed is too low, or a lower gear when the speed is too high, no shift is effected. This prev ents the engine from running at too low or too high rev s. Do not accelerate during the selection proced ure. The selected gea r is indica ted in the transm ission display . 145 Electronically controlled driving programmes z Adaptive programm es automatically adap t gea r shifting to suit the driving style, e. g.: z Automatic neutral shift function autom atically sets the transm ission to N to reduce fuel consum ption, e.g. at tra ffic lig hts. – Sporty driving: Transmission changes gear a t higher engine speeds. The automatic neutral shift function is activated when the following occurs simultaneously: – Economical driving: Transmission cha ng es gear at lower engine speeds. – The selector lever is in D or m anual mode – Ad aptation to special driving conditions still tak es place, such as: driving up and down hills, w hen tow ing a carava n or tra iler, and with a heav y load. – The foot brak e is depressed – The vehicle is stationary – The accelerator ped al is not a ctuated Transm ission dis play – Transm ission oil temperature is over 0°C. The transmission display in the tachometer dial shows the currently engaged gear or current mode. As soon as the brake is released and the accelerator ped al is depressed, the vehicle sta rts off in the usual manner. P Park position. R Reverse gear. N Neutra l or idling position. D Autom atic mode. 1-5 Manual mode, selected gea r. z By m eans of delay ed gear cha nging (higher engine speed s) following a cold start, the opera ting temperature programme quickly and automatically bring s the catalytic conv erter to the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. z Winter programme: press button T – see next c olumn. 146 Engine braking The autom atic transmission will select the driving p rogram me for op tim um engine brak ing effect. If required, low er gears can also be ma nually selected to increase the engine brak ing effect. First gear has the greatest brak ing effect. Rocking the car Winter programm e T Kickdown In the event of starting-off diffic ulties on slip pery roa ds, press button T (can be opera ted only in D – T lights up). The vehic le will start off in fourth gear. Ac celera tor pedal pressed past the pressure point: dep ending on engine speed, the transmission shifts down into a low er gear. Full engine power is av ailable for a cceleration. The w inter programme is sw itc hed off by: z pressing button T a gain, z switching off the ignition, z selector lev er in m anual mode. If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole, mov e the selector lever from D to R in a repeat p attern while simultaneously app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden a cceleration. This applies only to the ex ceptional circumstances mentioned above. For reasons of safety, K ickdown also functions in m anual mode. To protect against d amage, the startingoff aid automatically cuts out at very hig h transm ission oil temperatures. 147 Stopping the vehicle The selector lever ca n b e left in the c hosen gear w ith the engine running. When stopping on grad ients engage ha ndb ra ke or depress brak e pedal. To prevent overheating of the transm ission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while stand ing if a gear has been selected . Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at lev el crossings. Manoeuvring the vehicle To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attem pts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement c an be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate a ccelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. Before leaving the vehicle, apply handbrake, then place selec tor lever in position P a nd remove ignition key. The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the selector lever is not in P when the ignition is switched off, control indicator j in the selector lever indicator strip flashes – see p age 145, Fig. 15086 J. S hift the selector lever to P. If the ignition key is not removed, the battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is then left to stand for a lengthy period of tim e. 148 Fault In the ev ent of a fault the control indicator A lig hts up. The transmission no longer shifts automatically . Driving can b e continued: In ma nual m ode second and fifth g ears can be selected. Depending on the fault, it may be that only fifth gea r can be selected. In automatic m ode, only fifth gear is ava ilab le when in D. Illumination of control indicator A can also indicate a fault in the engine electronic s – see page 164. Hav e ca use of fa ult remedied. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system ’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Inte rruption of power supply If the v ehicle b attery is flat, the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P. If the ba ttery is flat, start the v ehicle using jump lead s – see page 200. If the cause is not a discharged battery, unlock selector lev er: 1. Apply hand brake. 2. Remove the ashtray – see page 90. 4. Push bar down with a screwdriver and move selector lever out of P. 5. Refit ashtra y socket in centre console and latch into position. 6. Refit ashtra y. Re-selecting P locks the selector lever aga in. Have cause of power sup ply interruption remedied . We recommend that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. 3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards. 149 CVTronic 3 In continuously variable automatic mode the transm ission ra tio is continuously variable. The engine speed is in the op tim um torque range. Moving the selector lever from N to D puts the tra nsmission into this m od e. When op erating out of continuously variable autom atic mode, the CVTronic electronically simulates the shifting of a conv entional autom atic transmission w ith defined gears. This mode is selected by moving the selec tor lever from D to the left. CVTronic is an autom atic transmission with the following facilities: z Continuously va riabl e autom atic m od e, z Out of c ontinuousl y vari able a utomat ic mode, z Manual m ode. 150 Gears can be selected manually in manual mode. H ig her or lower tra nsmission ratios are manually selected by moving the selector lever from D to the left and tapping towa rd + or -. After starting the engine, op erate the brak e before selecting a mode. If a mode is selected and the b ra ke is released, the vehicle " creeps" . Never operate the acc elerator and brake ped als simultaneously. Disregard of these instructions ma y lead to injuries or endanger life. The engine can only b e started with lever in position P or N . When position N is selected, press foot brake or enga ge handbrak e before starting. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. The selector lever p osition is indica ted in the tra nsmission display. Sele ctor lever in P, R and N P Park. Front wheels lock ed. O nly with vehicle stationary and handbrake on. R Reverse. Only engage when vehic le stationa ry . N Neutra l or idling position. The selector lever can only be mov ed out of P or N when the ignition is switched on and the foot brake is depressed (selector lever lock ). In positions P or N the control indicator j in the selector lev er indicator strip w ill light up red – see figure. If the transmission oil temp erature is less than -25 °C the selector lever cannot be moved until the transmission oil temperature reaches -25 ° C when the engine is running (P or N flashes in the tra nsmission display as long as the selector lever is loc ked). 151 Ratio ad aptation takes plac e in 6 gears in this mod e. The max imum sp eed is reached in 5th gear, and 6th gear is for econom ical driving. A is shown in the transm ission display . Continuously variable autom atic mode Out of continuously variable automatic mode Move selector lever from N to D (d o not move to left in D). Move selector lever to left in position D. Drive position for norm al driving positions. D is shown in the transmission display. 152 If the engine speed is too slow , a lower gear is a utomatically selec ted. At high engine speeds a higher gear is not autom atic ally selected. For reasons of safety, K ickdown also functions in manual mode – see page 155. The enga ged gear is show n in the tra nsmission display. Manual m ode (ActiveSelect) Trans miss ion display Shift the selector lev er from D first to the left and then forward or rearward. The transm ission display in the tachometer dial shows the currently engaged gear or current m od e. + Switch to higher gear - Switch to lower gear P Park p osition. If a higher gear is selected at too slow a speed or a lower gear at too high a speed, no change takes place. This avoids engine speeds tha t are too high or too low. R Reverse gear. N N eutral or idling position. D C ontinuously v ariable automa tic mode. The m aximum speed is reached in 5th gear. 6th gear is d esigned for econom ic al driving. A O ut of continuously variable automatic m ode. 1-6 Manual m od e, selected transm ission ratio. 153 Ele ctronically controlled driving programme s z Ad aptive programmes a utoma tica lly adapt the tra nsmission ratio to the driv ing sty le, e.g. : – Sporty driving style: transmission changes at higher engine speed s. – Ec onomical driving sty le: transm ission ra tio cha nges at slow er speeds. – Adaptation to special driving conditions still takes pla ce, such as: driving up a nd down hills, tow ing a carav an / trailer and with heavy loa ds. z Automatic neutral shift function automatically sets the transmission to N to reduc e fuel consumption, e.g. at traffic lights. The automa tic neutral shift function is activa ted when: – The selector lever is in autom atic mode or manual mode – The foot brake is depressed – The vehic le is stationary – The accelerator pedal is not actuated – Tra nsmission oil tem perature is ov er 0°C . As soon as the brake is released and the accelerator pedal is depressed, the vehicle starts off in the usual m anner. 154 z After a cold start the operating temperature program me ra pidly brings the cataly tic converter to the optimum temperature that is required to op tim ise pollutant reduction b y means of using the app ropriate ratio (increased engine speed ). z The speed programm e lim its the engine speed to protect the transmission from damage at high transmission oil temperatures. z Winter programme: press button T – see next c olumn. Engine braking C VTronic automatically selects the driving programm e w ith the optimum eng ine brak ing effect. If necessa ry, lower gea rs ca n also b e selected in manual mode to increase the am ount of braking assistance. Gear 1 has the greatest b ra king effect. Rocking the car Winter programm e T Kickdown In the event of starting-off diffic ulties on slip pery roa ds press button T, which can be selected either in or out of continuously variable automatic m od e (T lig hts up). The v ehicle will start off with a hig h transm ission ra tio. Ac celera tor pedal pressed past the pressure point: dep ending on engine speed, the transmission shifts down into a low er gear transm ission ra tio. Full engine power is av aila ble for acc elera tion. The w inter programme is sw itc hed off by: z pressing button T a gain, z switching off the ignition, z switching to Manual mode. If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole, mov e the selector lever from D to R in a repeat p attern while simultaneously app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden a cceleration. This applies only to the ex ceptional circumstances mentioned above. For safety reasons Kic kdown is available in all modes. To protect against d amage, the startingoff aid automatically cuts out at very hig h transm ission oil temperatures. 155 Stopping the vehicle The selector lever ca n b e left in the c hosen gear w ith the engine running. When stopping on grad ients engage ha ndb ra ke or depress brak e pedal. To prevent overheating of the transm ission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while stand ing if a gear has been selected . Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at lev el crossings. Manoeuvring the vehicle To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attem pts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement c an be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate a ccelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. If the selector lever is not in P when the ignition is switched off, control indicator j in the selector lever indicator strip flashes – see p age 151, Fig. 15086 J. S hift the selector lever to P. Before leaving the vehicle, app ly ha ndb ra ke, then place selector lever in position P and remove ignition key. The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the ignition key is not removed, the battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is then left to stand for a lengthy period of tim e. Fault C ontrol indicator A illuminates if a fault occurs. Driving ca n be c ontinued: The choice of transm ission ra tio is restricted . The v ehicle accelerates more slowly and the max imum speed is limited . C ertain faults p revent the use of ma nual mode. Illumination of control indicator A can also indicate a fault in the engine electronics – see page 164. Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied . 156 Re-selecting P locks the selector lever aga in. Have cause of power sup ply interruption remedied . We recommend that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. Interruption of power supply If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector lev er ca nnot be moved out of position P. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads – see pag e 200. 4. Push ba r down with a screw driv er a nd move selector lever out of P. 5. Refit ashtray socket and click it into place. 6. Refit ashtray. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, release selector lev er: 1. Ap ply handbrake. 2. Remove the ashtray – see page 90. 3. Pull out ashtra y socket upw ards. 157 Driving hints Never coast with engine not running Many units w ill not function in this situation (e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic power steering). Driving in this ma nner is a danger to y ourself a nd others. Brake servo unit When the engine is not running, the brake servo unit is no longer effective once the brake peda l has been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not reduced , but braking requires significantly grea ter force. Electro-hydraulic powe r ass isted ste ering The first 600 miles / 1000 km Drive your vehicle at v arious speeds. Do not use full throttle. Never allow the eng ine to labour at low revs. Make good use of all gea rs. Depress the accelerator pedal a maximum of around three quarters of the ava ila ble ped al travel in all gears. Do not drive faster than three quarters of max imum speed. Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km ). If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the engine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered, but considera bly more forc e is req uired. Driving in mountainous te rrain or with a caravan / trailer The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling p ow er is therefore independent of the engine speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is genera ted at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping with the gradient in the higher g ear. Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10 % or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) in 1st gea r, 30 m ph (50 km /h) in 2nd gear; with autom atic transmission 3 in gear 1 and with C VTronic 3 in m anual mode in transm ission ratio 1, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Driving with a roof load Do not exceed the perm issible roof load – see pages 188, 263. For reasons of safety, distribute the loa d ev enly a nd secure it properly with reta ining straps so that it cannot slip . Set the ty re p ressure to the va lue sp ecified for a full load. Do not drive faster than 75 m ph (120 km/h). C heck and retig hten the straps frequently. Switching off the e ngine When y ou switch off, fans in the eng ine compa rtm ent may continue running for a time to cool the engine. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. after driving in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to id le for approx im ately two minutes in order to prevent heat acc um ulation. Vehicles with engine Z 20 N ET 1 ): After running at high eng ine speeds or high eng ine loads, op erate the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 seconds before switching off in ord er to protec t the turbocharger. 1) 158 Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 256. Save energy – more miles Engine s pe ed Clutch operation Please observe the running-in hints on the previous pag e and the tips for energ y saving on the following pages. Driv e in a low engine speed range for each gear a s m uc h as possible. Alway s d epress the c lutch pedal hard to the floor to p revent shifting difficulties and transmission damage. Good, technica lly correct and economical driving ensures ma ximum durability and performance for your vehic le. Overrun 3 The fuel supply is autom atically shut off during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect, do not acc elerate during overrun and, if in manual transm ission mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent dam age to the cata ly tic converter, overrun cut-off is temp orarily deactivated when the cataly tic conv erter temperature is high. 20 N ET 1): Vehi cles w ith engine Z Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if the a ccelerator is released quickly on account of air flow in the turbocharger. Warming up Allow the engine to warm up while driving. Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling speed. Do not apply full throttle until the engine has reached op erating temperature. After a cold start, the automatic tra nsmission or C VTronic does not shift to higher gears until faster speeds hav e been reached . This allows the catalytic converter to quic kly reach the temperature req uired for optimum pollutant reduction. Correct gear sele ction P edals Do not place any ob jects in the footwell which could slip under the ped als and inhibit the pedal trav el. To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals. Battery care Engine in neutral a nd without rev ving in the low er gears. Stop-and-go traffic and driving a t a speed too high for the selected gear or transmission ratio increases wear and fuel consum ption. When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is sta tionary, e. g. in slow urban traffic , stop-start traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electric al loads where possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated seats). Change down Declutch w hen sta rting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the ba ttery. When decreasing speed, shift down into the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch with a high-revving engine. This is especially important when hill climb ing. 1) When driving do not use the pedal as a footrest; this will cause sub stantial clutch wear. Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 25 6. 159 Save fuel, protect the environment New painting techniques employ wa ter as a solv ent. End-of-life ve hicle recovery Information on end-of-life vehicle recovery centres and the recy cling of end-of-life vehicles is availab le at ww w.vauxhall.co. uk Drive in an e nergy and environme nt-conscious way z High fuel consumption, noise lev els and exhaust emission are often caused b y a driving style that is not energy and env ironment-c onscious. z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in mind – "more miles with less fuel" . Trend-setting technology When dev eloping and manufac turing your vehic le, Vauxhall used environmentfriendly and in the m ain recyc la ble materials. The production methods used to mak e y our v ehicle are likewise env ironmenta lly -compatible. Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of energy a nd water requirements a lso help s to conserve natural resources. A highly adv anced design mea ns that your vehic le can be easily disassembled at the end of its working life, and the individual materials separated for subsequent re-use. Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium are not used . The refrigerant in the air conditioning system 3 is C FC -free. 160 Reduce the noise level and exhaust emissions b y adopting an environmentconsc ious driving style. This is ex tremely worthwhile and im proves the quality of life. Fuel consumption depends to a great extent on your own personal driving style. The follow ing hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified lev els – see page 260, 261. Check your vehic le’s fuel consum ption every time you refuel. This facilita tes early detection of a ny irregularities causing increased fuel consumption. Warming up z Full throttle and w arming up at idle speed increase w ear, fuel consumption, ex haust em ission, the am ount of pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount of noise. z Driv e off imm ediately after starting. Wa rm up the engine b y running it at moderate eng ine speeds. Uniform speed z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel consumption, the ex haust emissions, the proportion of pollutant in the exhaust gas and the noise level. z Do not accelerate a nd brake unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed. Avoid frequent starting off and stopping e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans of clever planning . Select road s w ith good traffic flow . Idling z The eng ine also consumes fuel when idling . z If you have to wait for more than one minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling corresponds to ap prox imately 0.6 miles (1 k ilom etre) of d riv ing. Overrun z The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking – see page 159. z To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect a nd sav e fuel, during overrun do not ac celera te and do not declutch. Corre ct gear selection z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel consumption. z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at high engine speeds. Driv ing with an ey e on the tachom eter saves fuel. I f possib le, drive a t low rev s in each gear and a t a consta nt speed. Driv e in top g ear as m uch a s p ossible, shift up as soon as possib le and do not shift down until the engine is no longer running truly . High speed z The faster the speed, the higher the consumption and the noise level. Driving at full throttle uses up a g reat deal of fuel and generates ex cessive noise a nd hig h emission levels. z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al results in distinct fuel savings with no major loss of speed. Drive at no more tha n around three quarters of max imum speed and you will use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a great deal of time. Tyre inflation pres sure z Inadequate ty re p ressure, leading to higher road resistance, costs m oney in two wa ys: for more fuel and increased tyre wear. z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off. Electrical loads z The power consum ption of electrical equip ment increa ses fuel consumption. z Sw itch off additional consumers (e.g. air conditioning 3, hea ted rear window) when they are no longer required. Roof racks, ski-holders z Roof loads can increase fuel consump tion by approx. 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1l/100 km) due to air resistanc e. z Remove them if they are not being used. Repair and maintenance z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and maintenance work can increase fuel consumption. Do not carry out w ork on the eng ine yourself. You may out of ignorance infringe environmental law s b y not disposing of materials properly. Appropriate parts m ight not be rec ycled . Contact with some of the materia ls inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard. z We recom mend that repair and maintenance be entrusted to a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Extre me driving conditions z Driv ing up steep gradients, cornering, driving on poor roads and winter driving all increase fuel consumption. Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter temperatures, especially on short trip s when the engine operating tempera ture is not reached. z Follow the hints given above to keep consumption to a m inimum under suc h cond itions. 161 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Fuel consumption Fuel for pe trol engine s Fuel consumption is determined under specific driving conditions – see page 260. C om mercially availab le high-quality fuels are suitable (catalytic conv erter – see pag e 164, octane numbers – see pag es 256, 257). Fuel quality has a d ecisive influence on the power output, running behaviour and service life of the engine. The ad ditiv es conta ined in the fuel play an important role in this reg ard. Y ou should therefore only use high-quality fuels containing additives. Fitting special equipment will increase the weight of the vehicle. This in turn increases fuel consumption and reduces the specified m aximum speed of the vehicle. For the first few thousand miles / kilometres, friction between the engine and tra nsmission components is higher. This increases fuel consum ption. Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pink ing. Va ux hall cannot be held liable for resulting damage. Petrol with a hig her octane number can alway s be used . The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted in vehicles with engine Z 22 Y H1 ). Pump nozzles for leaded fuel ca nnot be inserted into the filler nec k of vehicles tha t operate on unlead ed fuel. The ignition timing adjusts automatically to the grade of fuel used (octane number) – see pages 256, 257. Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95 will ensure economical driv ing. 1) 162 Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 256. Fuel for diesel engine s Diesel engines must be operated only on commercially ava ila ble diesel fuel meeting the specific ations of DIN EN 590. Do not use ma rine diesel oils, heating oils or entirely or partially plant-b ased diesel fuels, such as rape seed oil or b io diesel, Aquazole and sim ilar diesel-w ater emulsions. The flow a nd filterability of diesel fuel are tem perature-d epend ent. Diesel fuels with improved lowtem perature properties are therefore ava ilab le on the market during the winter months. Make sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season. Additives can be used with d iesel fuels with winter p roperties that are guaranteed by the m anufacturer and when using diesel fuel filters that are heated depending on the outside temperature. Re fue lling C are must be ta ken when handling fuel. Before refuelling, it is absolutely vital to switch off the engine and any heating systems with combustion cha mbers. Sw itch off all mobile phones. Petrol is flamma ble and exp losive. Please therefore avoid naked flames and sparks when ha ndling fuel, even when you are in the vicinity of fuel. Do not smoke! This also applies in places where petrol can only be detected by its characteristic smell. If you ca n smell petrol in the vehicle, have cause thereof rem edied imm ediately. We recomm end that you consult a Va ux hall Authorised Repairer. The fuel tank filler neck is located on the rig ht, rear side of the vehicle. The tank flap is locked together with the doors – see page 58. Open the tank flap . Unscrew fuel filler c ap to open, remove and suspend from tank fla p. The fuel tank has a limiting sy stem which prevents ov erfilling of the tank. C orrect filling depends to a large extent on proper operation of the fuel disp ensing pump: 1. Fully insert the pump nozz le and switch it on. 2. After the automatic cut-off, the nominal capacity of the tank ca n be obtained by top ping up with two doses of fuel. Make sure the nozzle is fully inserted. To close, position the fuel filler cap a nd rotate until the cap audibly clicks over the reta iner. C lose fuel tank cov er. Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately . 163 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases Dama ge to the catalytic conv erter or the vehicle m ay result if the following points are not observed : z If the engine misfires or runs roughly after a cold start, the engine power has reduced significantly or other unusua l operating problems occur that indicate a fault in the ignition system , please contac t a workshop as quickly a s possible. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Driv e a t a slower speed a nd with less engine revs for a short tim e if necessa ry . Catalytic converter for petrol engines 3 Leaded fuel will da mage the cata ly tic conv erter and parts of the electronic sy stem, rend ering them inoperative. Use of high-qua lity fuels other than those specified on p age 162 (e.g. LR P1 )) could damage the catalytic converter. On vehicles with a c atalytic converter, the fuel ta nk filler nec k is of a narrow design so that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel cannot b e inserted . 1) 164 LRP = L ead Rep la cem ent Petro l. Irregular engine running a nd a loss of engine power when the Traction Control sy stem 3 or the Electronic Stability Program me 3 come into action are determined b y the op erating conditions and are therefore of no significance – see pages 168, 170. z If unb urnt fuel enters the c atalytic conv erter, this may result in overheating and irreparable damage to the c atalytic conv erter. You should therefore av oid unnecessarily long use of the starter when starting off, running the tank dry (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to overhea ting) and starting the engine by pushing or towing. z If the emission control indicator Z flashes, slow down until the flashing stops a nd the control indicator is steady . Conta ct a workshop immediately . We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer. For emission control indicator Z – see page 166. Catalytic converter for dies el engines 3 Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z If the engine runs roug hly , the engine power ha s reduc ed significa ntly or other unusual operating problems occur, please contact a workshop as quickly a s possible. We recomm end that y ou consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. Drive at a slower speed and with less eng ine rev s for a short time if necessary. Irregular engine running and a loss of eng ine power when the Traction C ontrol system 3 or the Electronic S ta bility Programme 3 com e into action are determined by the opera ting conditions and are therefore of no significance – see pages 168, 170. Controlling exhaust emission Throug h design-rela ted measures – mainly in the a rea of the fuel-injection and ignition systems – the proportion of nox ious ma terials in the exhaust, such as carbon monoxide (CO ), hydrocarbons (HC) a nd nitrogen oxides (NO x), is reduced to a minimum. 165 In some cases the fault can be eliminated by sw itc hing the engine off and back on aga in. If the c ontrol indicator lights up aga in when the engine is running, consult a workshop to have the cause of the fault remedied. We recom mend a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repa irer. If it lights b riefly, but does not rec ur, it is of no significance. Flashing with the ignition switched on indicates a fault in the immobiliser system. The engine c annot be started – see pag e 55. Cont rol indica tor Z for exhaust Lights up when ignition is switched on a nd rem ains illuminated during starting. Goes out shortly a fter engine starts. If it lights while the engine is running there is a fault in the emission control sy stem. The p ermitted em ission values may be exceeded. C onsult a workshop immediately . We recomm end a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 166 Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault that may damage the catalytic conv erter. You can continue to drive without causing damage by slowing down until the fla shing stop s and the control indica tor is stead y. C onsult a workshop immed iately. We recommend tha t you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Control i nd icator A for engine elect ronics (w ithin tachometer display dial) If it lights w hen the engine is running , there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic system switches to an emergency running programme. Fuel consumption may be increased a nd the driveab ility of the vehicle may be impaired. Exhaust gases Engine ex haust ga ses contain poisonous carbon monox ide, which is colourless and odourless and could be fatal if inhaled. If ex haust fumes penetrate the vehicle interior, open the windows and c onsult a work shop imm ediately. We recomm end that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. When the vehicle is driven for the first time, wax and oil on the exhaust sy stem ma y evaporate, producing sm ok e-like emissions. Allow wax and oil to eva pora te while the vehic le is in open a ir. Avoid inhaling. Maintenance Have all maintena nce work c arried out at the intervals spec ified by Va ux ha ll. We recommend that you entrust this work to a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho has prop er equipment a nd trained personnel available. Electronic testing sy stems permit ra pid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This way y ou can be certain that all components of the vehic le’s electrical, injection and ignition system s operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of polluta nt em ission and tha t the cataly tic conv erter system will have a long serv ice life. Y ou are thereby making an im portant contribution towards keeping the air clean and c om pliance w ith emissions legislation. C hecking and adjustment of the fuelinjection and ignition systems is part of the scope of inspec tion. For this reason you should hav e a ll maintenance work carried out a t the intervals specified in your Serv ice Booklet. 167 Drive control systems Traction Control system (TC P lus ) 3 TC P lu s p revents the driving wheels from spinning, irrespective of the road conditions and tyre grip. The system m onitors the rotational sp eed of all wheels. As soon as at lea st one driving wheel sta rts to spin, the engine output is reduced (the sound of the engine cha ng es) and the spinning wheel is b ra ked. This improves the vehicle’s directional control and d riv ing power, particularly on snow and ic e as well as on wet or slippery road s. 168 TC Pl us is ready for operation as soon as the ignition is switched on and the c ontrol indicator v goes out. When the TCP lu s comes into ac tion, v flashes. The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion; TC Pl us allows you to keep control of the vehicle a nd reminds you to ad apt your speed to the road conditions. Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into taking risks when driving. Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le. Cont rol indica tor v Lights up for a few sec onds when ig nition is switched on. The system is now ready for opera tion. Flashing during driving This shows the system has com e into action. The engine output may be reduced (the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a small degree. Lights while driv ing Fault in the sy stem: Driving ca n continue. Spinning drive wheels ca n cause driving stability to worsen unless driving style is adapted, depending on ac celera tion and road surface. Have cause of fault rem edied. We recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diag nostics a llows faults to be q uick ly remedied. Sw itching off 3 TC Pl us can be deactivated by pressing button v 3. Deactivation is only possible up to a speed of 40 mph (60 k m/h) and is indicated by illumination of control indicator v on the instrument panel. TC Pl us is reactivated by pressing b utton v aga in or the nex t time the ignition is switched on. 169 Ele ctronic Stability Program me (ESP Plus ) 3 ES P Pl us imp rov es driving stability when necessary, irrespective of the road surface and the ty re grip in all d riv ing situations. I t also contains the functions provided by the Traction Control sy stem. The system monitors vehicle m ovements. As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve (und ersteers / oversteers) engine output is red uced (the sound of the engine changes) and individual wheels are specifically braked. This considerably im proves the driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slipp ery road surfaces. ESP P lu s is read y for op eration as soon as the ignition is switc hed on and c ontrol indica tor v goes out. When the ESP Pl us comes into action, v flashes. The vehic le is now in a critical situation; ESP P lu s allows you to keep c ontrol of the vehicle and remind s y ou to adapt y our speed to the road c onditions. Do not let this special safety fea ture tempt you into ta king risks when d riv ing. Traffic safety c an only be achieved by adopting a responsible driving style. C ont rol indic ator v Lights up for a few second s when ignition is switched on. The system is now ready for operation. Flashing during driving This shows the system has com e into action. The engine output may be reduced (the sound of the eng ine changes) and the vehicle m ay be brak ed a utoma tica lly to a small degree. 170 Lights while driving Fault in the ES P system. Driv ing can be continued. Poor road surfac e conditions may how ever still ca use vehicle stability to be impaired. Hav e ca use of fa ult remedied. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system ’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Swit ching off 3 ESP P lu s can be deactivated by pressing button v 3. Deactivation is only possible up to a speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and is ind icated by illumination of control indica tor v on the instrument panel. ESP P lu s is reactivated by pressing button v again or the next time the ignition is switched on. 171 Cruis e control 3 Cruise control can store and maintain speeds from approx. 20 to 125 mph (30 to 200 km /h). For safety reasons, the c ruise c ontrol cannot be activated until the foot brake has been activated once. Cruise control is operated with buttons m , g, and § on the turn signal stalk. Do not use the c ruise control if it is not adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed (e. g. in situations presenting a danger to yourself and other road users, in heavy traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy roads). With automatic transmission or C VTronic, it is ad visab le to only use the cruise control in D gear or continuously v ariable a utoma tic mode. When the cruise control is active, reaction times may be increased due to the different position of the feet. Disreg ard of these instructions may lead to injuries or end ang er life. Control i nd icator m Lights up for a few seconds when ignition is switched on. The system is now ready for op eration. To act ivat e: Tap button m : the current sp eed is stored and m ainta ined. The accelerator pedal can b e released . When driving, the control indicator m will lig ht up as soon as the system is switched on. Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator ped al is relea sed, the previously stored sp eed is resum ed. I nc rea se With cruise control a ctiv e, hold down button m or tap it repeatedly: speed is increa sed continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km /h) without using the acc elerator pedal. When button m is released the current speed is stored and maintained. 172 Decel era te With cruise control activ e, press button g or tap it repeatedly: speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1. 2 mph (2 km/h). When button g is released the current speed is stored and m aintained. To dea ctiv ate: Ta p button § : cruise control is switched off, control indicator m goes out and the vehicle slowly dec elera tes. To continue driving, depress the accelerator pedal in the usual manner. For reasons of safety, c ruise control switches off automatically under certa in driving conditions. For example: Resuming t he stored speed Tap button g at a speed above 20 m ph (30 km/h): the speed selected before the cruise control w as switched off is resumed. The stored speed is erased when the ignition is switched off. z the vehicle’s speed drops below approx . 20 mph (30 k m/h) or z the brake peda l is depressed or z the clutch p edal is depressed or z automatic transmission or CVTronic selector lever in N. 173 Parking distance se nsors 3 The p arking dista nce sensors m akes rev erse p arking easier by m easuring the distance b etween the vehicle and an obstacle, and giving an acoustic signal in the p assenger compartment. The sy stem registers distance b y means of four sensors in each of the front and rear bumpers. To act ivat e: With the ignition switched on and in vehicles with automatic transmission or C VTronic, the front and rear parking distance sensors are a utomatically ena bled when rev erse gear is selected or the selector lever is mov ed to the R position. The parking distance sensors c an also be activa ted a t speed s of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) by pressing the r button on the instrument panel. The functional read iness of the sy stem is indicated by the LED in the button lighting up. 174 C arava n / trailer tow ing equipm ent 3, ca ravan / t railer tow ing The sy stem automatically detects if a towbar is fitted to the vehicle. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to the front or rea r, a series of signals is sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter a s the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is less than 30 cm , the signal will b e continuous. Und er certain circum stances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as w ell as external noise sourc es may cause the system to fail to detect ob stacles. For this reason, care must be ta ken when reversing ev en if the park ing distance sensors are op erational. This is of p artic ular im porta nce when in the vicinity of ped estria ns. To deacti vate: To d eactiva te the sy stem, press button r again, the LED in the button w ill go dark. The sy stem switches itself off autom atically when the forwards speed exceeds approx. 15 mph (25 k m/h). When towing, inserting the tra iler plug in the socket automatically switches off the park ing distance sensors. Fitti ng rear load racks 3 Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted nea r the sensors could disrupt the system . Control i nd icator r If it lights up Fault in the sy stem. The system is not ready for operation. Have the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diag nostics a llows faults to be q uick ly remedied. If it flashes The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with snow or ice. The sensors must be undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e. Interference due to ex ternal sources of ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the sy stem will operate normally . 175 Tyre pressure control system 3 The ty re pressure c ontrol system continuously monitors the pressure in all four ty res whilst the vehic le is b eing driven. Ea ch wheel is fitted with a pressure sensor. Information on indiv id ua l tyre pressures is sent to a c ontrol unit and the p ressures of the ty res on the same axle are compared. If the sy stem detects one or m ore differences in tyre pressure, the ty res affected will be show n in the tachometer display. On vehicles with chec k control 3, the p ressure in the respective ty re w ill be accurately shown in the informa tion display. In order for the system to b e operable, all wheels must b e equipped with pressure sensors and the tyres m ust be filled to the correct pressure. The ty re pressure control system detects automatically if the vehicle is driven with a tyre pressure correct for a load of up to 3 persons or for a full load. O nce the ignition is switched on, the sy stem is operational and w ill continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 m ph (30 km /h) and a bove. The ty re p ressure control system does not replac e the need to check tyres manually using a suitable pressure gauge. C heck ty re pressures no less tha n every 14 days and p rior to any long journey . Tyre pressures should be check ed when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare. Ty re p ressures – see pages 184, 268. Control i nd icator w for system fault show n in tachom et er d isplay If it lig hts w hile driving, there is a fault in the sy stem. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified. We recommend tha t you consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows fa ults to be quickly remedied. If a wheel without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel) is mounted, w is displayed. 176 Displa y x in the ta chometer dial (exam ple) If it lights while driving , tyre pressure differences are ind icated by an a rrow pointing to the ty res in question. If d isplay is yellow the loss of pressure is minor, continue driving a t reduced speed. C heck tyre pressure at next opportunity using suitab le tyre pressure gauge, and correct the pressure as required. If d isplay is red ma jor d ifference in pressure or complete loss of pressure! Stop imm ediately and check tyre. If necessary, fit spare ty re – see pag es 205, 208. Displays in grap hical inform ation d isp lay 3 or colour informa tion displ ay 3 In version with c heck control 3 differing air pressures a re displayed in m essa ges in the inform ation d isplay whilst d riv ing (Fig. 13356 J shows colour informa tion display, Fig. 13357 J shows graphical inform ation d isplay ). For example, the following m essa ges can be d isplay ed: C hec k rear left t yre pressure At the same time a diagram is shown identifying the rear left ty re and listing the tyre p ressure: the loss of pressure is minor, continue driv ing at red uc ed speed. Chec k tyre p ressure at nex t opportunity using suitable tyre pressure gauge, and correc t the pressure as required. On the colour information disp la y this report will app ear in y ellow. Att ent ion! Rea r left tyre p ressure loss At the sam e time a diagram is show n identify ing the rear left tyre and listing the tyre pressure: m ajor difference in pressure or comp lete loss of pressure! S top imm ediately and c heck ty re. If necessary, fit spare tyre – see pages 205, 208. O n the colour informa tion display this report will appear in red. Acknowledgem ent of warnings – see pag e 42. 6 177 Genera l informa tion The spare wheel is not fitted with a pressure sensor. When the spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure control sy stem will not operate on this w heel, and the c ontrol indicator w will light up. The sy stem rem ains operational for the other three wheels. Vehicles with the tyre pressure control sy stem can be recognised by metal ty re valve stems with aluminium valv e cap s instead of conv entiona l rubb er shafts with plastic valve caps. When m anually checking ty re pressure w ith p ressure gauge, screw ada pter to v alve. Tyre pressure – see page 184. If a complete set of wheels not fitted with sensors for the tyre pressure control sy stem is used, e. g. four w heels with winter ty res, or if retro-fitting a different size of tyre, no fault report will b e display ed. The system will not be operational. Sensors for the tyre pressure control sy stem can b e fitted retrospectively if so desired. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The tyre pressure monitoring system valve cores and sealing rings must be replaced each time the tyres are changed. We recommend that you contact a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. 178 The use of liquid filled run-flat systems or repair kits can impair the functioning of the sy stem. During travel, the vehicle is automatically ra ised at the rear, increasing the spring tra vel a nd ground clearance. The Autom atic Level Control Sy stem is activated after ap prox . 2 miles (3 k ilometres), depending on the vehicle loa ding and the nature of the road surface. Head lig ht range adjustment – see page 117. In the event of m alfunctions, do not utilise the vehicle’s full load capa city. H ave the cause rem edied without delay . We recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer. Autom atic L evel Control System3 The Automa tic Lev el Control Sy stem a llows the v ehicle height to be kept practically constant thus significantly imp rov ing the handling when the rear of the vehicle is sub jected to varying loads – such as when towing a ca ravan / trailer. 179 Brakes Brake s yste m The effectiveness of the brakes is a n important factor for traffic safety. To improve effectiveness, do not b ra ke unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brake pads have been fitted. Brake pad wear must not exceed a specified limit. Regular maintenance as detailed in the Service Book let is therefore of the utmost importance for traffic safety. 180 Control i nd icator F for brak e pad w ea r If it lights when the engine is running : front disc brake pads worn down to minimum thick ness. Have worn brake pads replaced. We recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that ha ve b een tested a nd approved by Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking power. Foot bra ke The foot brak e comprises two independent brak e circuits. If a brak e circuit fails, the vehicle can still be brak ed using the other brak e circuit. If this occurs, howev er, the brake pedal must be depressed q uite far using considerab le force before braking effect occurs. The distance required for b ra king will be greater. Consult a work shop before continuing your journey. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. To ensure that full pedal travel can be utilised, especially if there is a fault in one of the brak e circuits, there must b e no mats in the p edal area. When the engine is not running, the assistance of the brake servo unit disappears once the brake ped al has been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not reduced, b ut b ra king requires significantly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind when towing. Check the brake lights b efore starting out on a journey. On v ehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are check ed automatically – see page 46. Shortly after starting each journey the effectiveness of the b ra ke system should be tested at low speed and without inconv eniencing other tra ffic, especia lly if the b ra kes are wet, e. g. after the vehicle has been washed. The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed reg ularly . If the brake fluid level is too low and the hand brake is not ap plied, control indicator R on the instrum ent panel lights up – see page 34. Handbra ke Alw ays apply handb ra ke firmly . On slopes apply the handb ra ke as firmly as possible. The mechanic al handbrake acts on the brakes on the rear wheels. It engages autom atic ally when applied. To release the handbrake pull the lev er up slightly, press the ratchet knob , and fully low er the lever. Brak e system control indicat or R The control indicator lights when the ignition is switched on, if the handbrak e is app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is too low. B ra ke fluid level – see page 240. If the control indicator lights w hen the ha nd brake is not applied: Stop. Interrupt your journey immediately . C onsult a workshop. We rec om mend a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. 181 ABS u The Anti-lock Brak e S ystem (ABS ) continuously monitors the vehicle’s brake system a nd prevents the wheels from locking regardless of the road c ondition and ty re grip. It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock. The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when sw erving to av oid an obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive round an obsta cle without releasing the brakes. 182 AB S control is m ade apparent though a pulse in the brak e pedal a nd the noise of the reg ulation process. For optimum braking, keep the brak e peda l fully dep ressed throughout the braking process, despite the fact that the peda l is p ulsating. Do not reduce the pressure on the pedal. Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into taking risks when driving. Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le. If there is a fault in ABS , the wheels may be subjec t to locking d ue to brak ing that is heavier tha n normal. The adva ntages of ABS are no longer op erational. The vehicle ca n no longer be steered and may swerve. Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied . You can continue driving, prov ided you drive with care a nd antic ipation. Cont rol indica tor u for ABS If illuminates for several seconds when the ignition is switched on and the system undergoes a self-check at the same time (may be audible). The system is ready for operation when the control indica tor goes off. If the control indicator does not g o out after a few second s, or if it lights while driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation. 183 Wheels, tyres Changing tyre / wheel type Before switching to different tyres or wheels, seek advice on technical possibilities. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will be able to advise y ou of any necessary mod ifications. If tyres of a size different than those fitted a t the factory are used, the electronic speedometer may require reprogramming to ensure tha t the correct speed is displayed. Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheels m ay lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroa d-worthy . Tyres See page 268 for suitable tyres a nd restrictions. Factory -fitted tyres are m atched to the chassis and offer optimum driving comfort and safety . Vehicles with Ty re Pressure C ontrol S ystem 3 When using winter ty res or you change to other tyre sizes, tyre pressure control sy stem sensors can b e retro-fitted if required. We recommend tha t you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. O therwise the system w ill not indicate tyre pressure differences. Ty re p ressure control system 3 – see page 176. Fitti ng new tyr es Fit tyres in pa irs or in sets, which is even better. Ensure tha t tyres on one axle are z the same siz e, z the same design, z the same make, z and have the same tread pattern. Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the direction of trav el. The rolling direction is indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall. Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design properties of the tyre. We recom mend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer to hav e the tyres replaced. A Vauxhall Authorised Repairer k nows the legal regulations concerning the disposal of tyres and therefore protects the environment and your health. Tyre inflation pressure C heck ty re pressures, including the spare wheel, a t least every 14 da ys and prior to any long journey ; the ty res should b e checked when cold. Don’ t forget to chec k the spare. 184 Use the valve cap key to mak e it easier to unscrew the v alve c aps. The key is located on the inside of the tank flap. On vehicles with Tyre pressure control sy stem 3, there is an adapter in the v alve cap k ey. For fitting the pressure ga uge ada pter to the valv e – see page 176. Tyre inflation pressures – see page 268 and label on inside of tank flap. After changing tyre siz es, have the la bel replaced. Do not reduce tyre pressure when the ty res are warm. Otherwise the pressure m ay drop below the permissible minim um when the ty res cool down. After having chec ked the tyre pressures, tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap key . Incorrect infla tion pressures will imp air safety, v ehicle handling, comfort and fuel economy and will increase tyre wear. If the pressure is too low, this can result in considera ble ty re warm -up and internal damage, leading to trea d separation and even to tyre blow-out at high sp eeds. Hidden ty re d amage is not eliminated by subsequently adjusting the inflation pressure. Incorrect ty re pressure may result in tyre blow-out. Tyre condition, wheel condition Drive over edges slowly and at a right angle if possible. Driv ing ov er sharp edg es can lead to hidd en ty re damage and wheel dam age which is only noticed later on. When p arking, ensure that the tyres are not pressed against the edge of the kerb. C heck ty res regularly for d amage (foreign bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in sidewa lls). C heck wheels for dam age. In the event of damag e or ab normal wear, consult a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Damage may lead to tyre blow-out. 185 z Never fit used tyres the previous history and use of which you do not k now. z So as not to impair b ra ke cooling, use only wheel trims approved for use on your vehicle. Tyre d esigna tions Meaning s: e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H Tread dept h Check tread depth regularly. If the front tyres show greater wear than the rear tyres, swa p the front wheels with the rea r wheels so that the tyres with deep er tread are on the front axle. For reasons of safety, tyres should be rep la ced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm). The leg ally permissible minimum trea d depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the wear indicators (TWI1 )). A number of wear indicators are sp aced at eq ual intervals around the tyre within the trea d. Their position is indicated by m arkings on the tyre sid ewall. General i nformati on z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if the ty res are worn. z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not b een used for six years should be used w ith ca re. 1) 186 TWI = T rea d We a r Ind icator. 195 = Tyre width in mm 65 = Aspect ratio (ty re height to tyre width) in % R = Belt ty pe: Radial 15 = Rim diam eter in inches 91 = Load ind ex e.g .: 91 represents 618 kg H = Speed cod e S peed code letters: Q S T H V W Up Up Up Up Up Up to 100 to 112 to 118 to 130 to 150 to 168 mph mph mph mph mph mph (160 (180 (190 (210 (240 (270 km /h) km /h) km /h) km /h) km /h) km /h) Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into contact with parts of the cha ins and b e dam aged . Remove the wheel trim – see pag e 209. Winter tyre s For notes on fitting new tyres – see page 184. See page 268 for restric tions. Tyre cha ins may only be used at sp eeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h) 1 ). When driving on roads that are free of snow, they may only be used for brief periods since they are subject to rap id wea r on ha rd roads and could snap. Winter tyres (M+ S tyres) im prove safety at tem peratures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all the wheels. The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they have limited qualities for winter driving. If the maxim um perm issible speed for the winter ty res is less than that of the vehicle, a notice ind icating the ma ximum permissible speed for the tyres must be affixed within the driver’s field of v ision 1). If y ou use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a summer tyre, the v ehicle’ s driveability may be affected, espec ia lly on slip pery roa d surfaces. Ob ta in a rep la cement for the faulty ty re as soon a s possible, and hav e the wheel balanced and fitted to the v ehicle. Tyre chains See pag e 268 for restrictions. Ty re chains are only p ermitted on the front drive wheels. Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no more than 15 m m to the ty re tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). Tempora ry w heel 3 Tyre chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel. If y ou need to use tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, fit the temporary spa re on the rear ax le and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the front axle. Wheel changing – see pag e 208. Adjust tyre infla tion pressure. Tyre pressure control sy stem 3 – see page 176. We rec om mend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 1) Va ries fro m country to country o n account of nationa l regula tions . 187 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed according ly . Roof racks 3 For reasons of safety and to avoid dam aging the roof, we rec om mend that you use the Va ux ha ll roof rack system approved for your vehicle. Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Driving hints – see page 158. 188 Version wit hout roof rail ing Lift the covers from the fitting openings. Attac h roof rack a t app ropriate points, see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions. Versi on with roof ra iling 3 Attach roof rack to roof railing at p oints show n in figure, see enclosed roof luggage rack sy stem instructions. Towing equipment 3 If the vehicle is not equipped with towing equipm ent, w e recommend having it retro-fitted by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will provide information about possible trailer load inc reases. The Vauxhall Authorised Repairer ha s instructions on how to install the towing equipm ent and any modifications that are req uired to the vehicle tha t affect the cooling sy stem or other equipment. The coupling ba ll bar should be removed or folded awa y when not in use. For installation dimensions of the tra iler towing equip m ent – see pages 278, 279, 280. Towing equipment with rem ovable coupling ball bar 3 , Ve rsion with turn knob 3 Stow age of coupl ing bal l bar The c oupling ba ll bar is stowed in a bag stra pped to the spare wheel – see page 195. Fit ting the coupl ing bal l bar Push ends of closure plugs together and pull out of opening for coupling b all bar. Stow the closure p lugs in the lug gage compartment. C hecking the tensioning of the coupling ball bar: z Red marking on turn knob points tow ards green marking on coupling ball bar. z Gap of approx . 6 millimetres between rotary knob and c oupling b all bar. z Key is in lock. 189 O therwise, the coup ling ball bar m ust be tensioned before it is inserted into the coupling housing: z Open coup ling ball bar, z Pull turn knob out and then turn it cloc kwise as far as it will g o – see figure. Inserting the coupling ball ba r: Insert the coupling ball b ar into the coupling housing and press the coupling ball bar firmly upwards until it engages in position. The turn knob snap s b ack into its hom e position resting against the coupling ball bar. Do not touch the turn knob when inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of injury . 190 O pen coupling ba ll bar. Remove key and put on provided protectiv e c lip . When the coup ling ball bar is locked the turn knob can no longer be p ulled out. Im portant Check that the coup ling ball bar is correctly attached : z Red m arking on turn knob points towa rd s w hite marking on coupling ball bar. z No g ap between turn knob a nd coupling ball bar. z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly in c oupling housing. z Coupling ball bar must be locked and key must be removed. Towing a caravan / trailer is only permitted with a properly attached coupling ball bar. If the coupling b all ba r cannot be properly attached, consult a work shop. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised R epairer. Di sm ounting the coupl ing bal l bar Close coupling ball b ar. Pull the turn k nob out a nd then turn it cloc kwise as far as it will go. Pull the coupling b all bar downwards out of the coupling housing and stow it in the lugg age compartment – see page 195, Fig. 14086 J . Insert the sealing p lug in the hole for the coupling b all bar. Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other high-pressure cleaners to clean the coupling b all bar. Towing e quipme nt with re movable coupling ball bar 3, version with levers 3 St owage of coup ling ba ll bar The coupling b all bar is stow ed in a bag strapped to the spare wheel – see pag e 195. Fitti ng the coupling b all b ar Removing the cover from the bumper cut-out: push the two slider ca tches towards each other and remove the cover downwards. 191 Remove the sealing plug from the hole for the c oupling ba ll bar. S tow both parts in the lugga ge c om partment. Check ing the tensioning of the coupling ball bar: Lever 1 m ust not protrude from the housing. Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be tensioned before it is inserted into the coupling housing: Push lever 1 to the left with left hand, at the sam e time pushing lever 2 forwa rd s – see diagram. 192 Inserting the coupling b all bar: Insert the coup ling ball bar into the coupling housing by apply ing slight pressure and allow it to engage in position. It will loc k automatically and loud ly. Fit the protective c ap to levers 1 and 2 and eng age. If it does not engage, re-tension the coupling ball bar and repeat the fitting procedure. I f necessary, consult a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. Imp or tant Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly attached: z Protective cap for levers 1 and 2 m ust be fitted and locked in place. z C oupling ba ll bar must be seated firm ly in coupling housing. z C oupling ba ll bar must be locked and key m ust be rem oved. Insert the key in the lock cylinder on the left-hand side of the coupling ball ba r a nd lock. The longer side of the key g rip must point downwards. Remove the key and fit the sealing cap to the lock cy linder. Towing a c aravan / trailer is only permitted w ith a properly attached coupling b all bar. If the coup ling ball bar cannot be properly attached, consult a workshop . We recommend that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. Di sm ounting the coupl ing bal l bar Remove the sealing cap from the lock cylinder. Insert the key in the lock cy linder and unlock . Remove the key a nd fit the sealing cap to the lock cy linder. Remove the protective c ap for lev ers 1 and 2. Push lever 1 to the left with left hand. Push lever 2 forwards. Pull coupling ball bar out of coupling housing. Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball b ar. Fitting the cover for the bumper cut-out: Push the two slider ca tc hes tow ards each other, insert the cover and slide the catches bac k outwards. Do not use steam -jet cleaners or other high-pressure clea ners to clean the coupling ball b ar. 193 Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 Folding out the c oup ling b all ba r The release lever is in the stowage compartment to the left in the luggage compartment. To open the stowa ge c om partment, push both latches down and open the cover. Push the release lever down; the LED remains lit as long as the coupling ball bar is not eng aged. A warning buzzer also sounds and the coupling ba ll bar pivots down. Mak e sure that no one is in the pivot zone of the coupling ball ba r. Risk of bodily injury. Pivot the coup ling ball bar rearwards until it engages. The LED must go out and the warning buzzer must cea se, otherwise repeat the proced ure. I mporta nt C heck tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly attached: z LED is not lit z No warning buzzer Tow ing is only permissible if the coupling ball bar is fitted properly. I f the coup ling ball bar d oes not engage correctly , the LED does not go out or the warning buzzer does not stop sound ing, consult a workshop. We rec om mend a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. 194 Caravan and trailer loads1) The permissib le carav an / tra iler loads are vehicle d epend ent and engine dependent ma ximum v alues which must not be exceeded. The actua l carav an / trailer load is the d ifference between the actual gross weight of the carav an / tra iler and the actual c oupling socket load with the carav an / tra iler attached . When the carav an / tra iler load is being check ed, therefore, only the caravan / trailer wheels – and not the jockey wheel – must be standing on the weighing apparatus. Stow ing the coupl ing bal l bar O pen the stowage compa rtm ent – see page 205. Push the release lev er down; the LED rem ains lit as long a s the coupling ball b ar is not engaged. A warning buz zer a lso sounds and the coupling ball bar p ivots down. Stow ing the removable coupling ball bar 3 The permissib le carav an / tra iler loads for y our v ehicle are giv en in the vehicle documents. Unless otherwise stated, they are valid for g ra dients up to max . 12 %. Stow the coupling b all bar in the bag and strap it to the spare w heel a s shown in the figure. Pivot the coupling ball bar to the right and up. The LED must go out and the warning buzzer must cease, otherwise repeat the proced ure. 1) Ob serve n atio nal regula tions. 195 The p ermissible carav an / trailer load should b e fully utilised only b y drivers who are adequa tely experienced in towing large or heavy carav ans / trailers. The p ermissible carav an / trailer load applies up to the specified incline and up to an altitude of 1000 m etres above sea level. Since engine power decreases as altitude increases because of the air becom ing thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, the p ermitted towing weig ht a lso decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres of additional altitude. The towing weight does not have to be reduced when driv ing on roads with slight inclines (less than 8 %, e.g. m otorway s). The ac tual ca ra van / trailer load plus the actual gross vehicle weight must not ex ceed the m aximum permitted towing weig ht. For exam ple, if the perm itted gross vehicle weight is utilised, the caravan / trailer load m ust only be used until the max imum perm itted towing weight is reac hed. The maximum permitted towing weig ht is shown on the identifica tion plate – see pag e 250. 196 Coupling socke t load The coupling sock et load is the load exerted by the caravan / trailer on the coupling ball. It can be varied b y chang ing the weight distribution when loading the caravan / trailer. The max im um perm issible coupling sock et loa d (78 kg ) is specified on the towing equipment identification plate and in the vehicle documents. Alway s a im for the maximum loa d, especially in the case of heavy caravans / trailers. The coupling socket load should never fall below 25 kg. When m easuring the coupling sock et load, make sure that the draw bar of the loaded caravan / trailer is at the same height as it will be when the c aravan / trailer is coupled with the towing v ehicle loaded. Particularly important for c aravans / trailers w ith tand em axle. Re ar axle load during towing When the carav an / trailer is coup led a nd the towing vehic le fully loaded (including all occupants), the perm issible rear ax le loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle docum ents) may be exceeded by 40 kg (90 lbs). If the permissib le rear axle load is exc eeded, a max imum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) a pplies. If national regula tions specify a low er ma ximum speed for vehicles towing a caravan / trailer, this must b e observ ed. Tyre inflation pressure Increase tyre pressure on the towing vehicle to the value specified for the loa d – see page 268. Also check the tyre inflation pressure on the caravan / trailer wheels and the spare w heel. Driving characteristics, towing tips Before attaching the ca ra van / trailer, lubricate the ball of the caravan / trailer towing device. However, do not do so if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ba ll, is being used to damp hunting. Handling is greatly influenced by the loading of the caravan / trailer. Loads should therefore be secured so that they cannot slip and be placed in the c entre of the c aravan / trailer if possib le, i. e. above the a xle. When pulling trailers whose stability on the road is low, and caravans whose perm itted total weight exc eeds 1400 k g, speeds should b e kept below 50 mph (80 k m/h); the use of an anti-hunting damper is emphatically recommend ed. Check caravan / trailer lighting b efore starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the vehicle are deactiv ated w hen towing a caravan or trailer. Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 k m/h) if possible, ev en in countries where hig her speeds are permitted. Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and a void sud den manoeuvres. If the carav an / trailer starts to swa y, driv e more slowly, d o not a ttempt to correct the steering and b ra ke sharply if necessary. The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling p ow er is therefore independent of the engine speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is genera ted at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping with the gradient in the higher g ear. Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10 % or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) in 1st gea r or 30 mp h (50 km/h) in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission 3 , do not ex ceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in position 1. The brakes are heav ily loaded when towing a caravan / trailer d ow n long gradients, so select the sam e gear as y ou would driving uphill and drive at roug hly the sam e speed. The automatic transmission 3 or C VTronic 3 w ill automatically select the driving programm e w ith the optimum eng ine brak ing effect. If necessary, the gears can a lso be selec ted ma nually. If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully , depress the brak e pedal a s hard as possible. Remem ber that the braking d istance for vehicles towing carava ns / trailers w ith and without brake is always greater than that for vehic les not tow ing a carav an / trailer. 197 In vehicles with autom atic transmission 3 or CVTronic 3 , use full throttle. Before starting off under extreme conditions (high c om bination w eight, mountainous terrain with steep inc lines), switch off all unnecessary elec trica l loa ds (e.g. heated rear wind ow , air conditioning sy stem 3, heated seats 3). Starting on inclines Vehicles with ma nual transmission: The m ost favourable engine sp eed when starting off on an incline is b etween 2500 and 3000 rpm for p etrol engines a nd between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine rpm c onstant, enga ge c lutch grad ually (let slip), release brake and open throttle. If possib le, the engine sp eed should not drop d uring this proced ure. 198 Self-help Diesel fuel system, ble eding Do not start with quick charge r Nev er let the tank run dry ! If c ontrol indica tor Y lights up, refuel as soon as possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes. This prevents d amage to electronic components. It is p ossib le to restart the engine if the ta nk ha s b een run dry . A delayed start is to be exp ected. Attempt to start the engine for a maximum of 60 sec onds. If the eng ine d oes not sta rt, wa it a few minutes and try aga in. Do not start by pushing or towing Because your vehicle is fitted with a cataly tic converter, it must not be started by pushing or towing. Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed according ly . 199 Starting the engine with jump leads 3 A vehicle with a discharged battery can be started using jump lead s and the battery of another vehicle. This must be done with extrem e ca re. Any dev iation from the following instruc tions c ould lea d to personal injury or damage resulting from battery explosion, as well as to damage to the elec trical sy stems in both vehicles. z Never ex pose the b attery to nak ed flames or spark s. z Do not disconnect the discharged battery from the vehicle. z Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, fa bric s or painted surfaces. The fluid contains sulp huric ac id which can cause injuries and d amage in the event of d irect contact. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. z Wear eye protec tion and protective clothing when handling a b attery. z Mak e sure that the battery p rov id ing the jump start has the same voltage as the battery in your vehicle (12 V). Its capa city (Ah) must not be substantially lower than that of the discha rg ed battery. The voltage and capa city are stated on the battery . 200 z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump starting. z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead . z Apply handbrak e. Transmission in neutral, automatic transmission 3 or CVTronic 3 in P. The battery is in a box at the front of the eng ine compartm ent, on the right-hand side as v iewed from the front. To open the box , pull the c ov er forwards and swing it upwards. z Do not connect leads to negative term inal of discharged battery! z The connection p oint should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z Route the lead s so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compa rtm ent. z The eng ine of the v ehicle prov iding the jum p sta rt can be allowed to run d uring starting. Attempts to start the engine of the vehicle with the disc ha rg ed b attery should be made at interv als of one minute and should not la st longer tha n 15 seconds. After starting, allow both engines to idle for approx. 3 minutes w ith the leads still connected. z In order to a void ex cess voltage in the electric al sy stem, b efore removing a lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the vehicle receiving the jump sta rt. Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the figure: z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when removing leads. 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery prov iding the jump start (identified by "+" sign on battery case or terminal). 2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the positive terminal 2 of the discharged battery (" +" sign). 3. Connect the first end of the other jump lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the battery prov iding the start ("–" sign). 4. Connect the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. 201 Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive tractive force c an damage the vehicle. Significantly greater force is req uired for braking: the brake servo unit is only operational when the engine is running . Considerably greater steering force is necessary since this unit is opera tiv e only when the engine is running. To prevent the entry of exhaust fum es from the tow ing vehicle, switch on the air recirc ulation 3 and close the wind ow s. Towing the vehicle To open the cover concealing the towing eye socket at the front right of the vehicle: disengage the cover a t the bottom by pressing and pull it off downwards. The towing eye is located in the compartment containing the jack and vehic le tools underneath the spare wheel in the lugga ge c om partment. Vehicle jack and tools – see page 208. Screw in the towing eye anti-c lock wise as fa r as it will go and use the wheel bolt wrench to tighten it until it is fully horizontal. Vehicle tools – see page 208. Attac h the tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the eye. Switch on ignition to release steering colum n lock and to permit opera tion of brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper. Manua l tra nsmission in neutral, automatic tra nsmission 3 or CVTronic 3 in N. Vehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3 should b e towed facing forw ards only and must not be tow ed faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km). If the transmission is defective, or if the abov e speed or distance is to be exceeded, the front ax le m ust be raised off the ground. Vehicles with C VTronic 3, always tow forward, no faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) and no further than 50 miles (80 k m). If transmission is d amaged or driving a t faster speeds or longer distances, lift vehicle a t front ax le. C onsult a workshop . We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will serve you b est to get your vehicle back on the roa d. 202 Towing se rvice Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on tow ing costs before employing any towing serv ice. In this w ay y ou a void unnecessary costs and possible insurance problem s during c la im processing . Towing another vehicle To op en the cover c oncealing the towing eye socket at the rear right of the v ehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off d ow nwa rds. The towing eye is located in the compartment containing the ja ck and vehicle tools underneath the spare w heel in the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack and tools – see page 208. S crew in the towing ey e anti-clockwise as far as it will go and use the wheel bolt wrenc h to tig hten it until it is fully horizontal. Vehicle tools – see pag e 208. Attach the tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the ey e. Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive tractive force c an damage the vehicle. 203 Warning triangle ¨ 3 , Saloon First-aid kit + 3, Saloon To acc ess p ress d ow n bar and open the cover. The warning triangle is secured to the boot lid with reta ining clips (see figure). Slide the triangle up and out of the clips. In some editions, the warning triangle is stowed together with the first-aid kit in a stowage compartment in the left-hand side trim. The first-aid kit / cushion is stowed in a stowage comp artment in the left-hand side trim . When loading the vehicle, alwa ys make sure the first-aid kit is ac cessible. 204 Warning triangle ¨ 3 , First-aid kit + 3, Estate The w arning triangle and first-aid kit / cushion are stored in a stowage compartment in the left-hand side trim. To op en, press down b oth latc hes in the cover a nd open. When loa ding the vehicle, always ma ke certain that the warning triangle and firstaid kit are easily accessible. Spare whee l S a loon The spare wheel is located in the luggage compa rtm ent under the floor cov er. It is secured with a pla stic wing nut. To open the floor cover, pull up the handle or strap. 205 Est ate The spare wheel is located in the luggage compartment under the load floor. It is secured with a plastic wing nut. 206 To op en the load floor, pull the release lever and lift the load floor c om pletely. Disengage the hook 3 located on the underside of the handle and suspend it from the up per sea ling edge so that the load floor rem ains open. Genera l informa tion Dep ending on version, the spa re wheel may take the form of a temp orary sp are wheel 3. Refer to the notes on pag es 187, 212, 268. O n vehicles w ith a lloy wheels 3 the spare wheel may have a steel rim. If y ou use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling may be altered. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le. Notes on tem porary spare wheel 3 z Using a temporary spare wheel may change the driving behaviour of the vehicle, particularly if using winter tyres 3. Replace defective ty re as quickly as possible, ba la nce wheel and fit to vehicle. z Replac e temporary spare w heel with full specification wheel without delay. z Fit only one temporary spare wheel. z Do not use tyre c hains. If y ou need to use tyre cha ins after suffering a flat front tyre, fit the temporary spare wheel on the rear axle and transfer one of the rear wheels to the front a xle. Chec k the ty re pressure and adjust it if necessary. z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 k m/h). z Follow temporary spare wheel instructions on pages 187, 212, 268. z Take bend s slowly. z Do not use the temporary spa re wheel for a lengthy period. The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre and a smaller rim than the standard tyres: using the spare w heel may a lter driving characteristics. Replace a defective ty re as soon as possible, hav e the wheel balanced and fitted to the v ehicle. 207 Changing whe els In order to reduce the cha nce of possible injuries, mak e the following preparations and note the procedure: z Park on a level, firm and non-slippery surface. z Switch on hazard warning system and apply handb ra ke. With automatic tra nsmission 3 or CVTronic 3 move selector lever to park position P, and w ith manual transmission select 1st gear or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle. Wa rning triangle – see page 204. Jack £ and ve hicle tools The jac k and the vehicle tools hav e been specially dev eloped for your vehicle and must only be used on that vehicle. Only use jack for changing w heels. The jac k and the vehicle tools a re in a stow age com partment in the luggage compartment beneath the spare wheel. O pening the floor cover – see pages 205, 206. 208 After use, stow away the jack and tools in the compartm ent as shown in figure. z Ta ke the spare w heel from the luggage com partment. z Before raising the v ehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z Nev er change more than one wheel at once. z Block the wheel d iagona lly opposite the wheel to be cha nged by placing w edge bloc ks or equivalent in front and behind the wheel. z If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm thick) should b e pla ced under the jack . Using a thicker b oard c ould dam age the jack and the v ehicle. z No people or animals may be in the vehicle when it is jacked up. z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehic le. z Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jac k. z Use the jack only to change wheels. 1. Prise off the wheel cover using the hook included with the vehicle tools. Vehicle tools – see p age 208. Anti-theft wheel trims – see page 211. 209 Alloy wheels 3 : Prise off the wheel b olt caps using a screwdriver and rem ov e them. 210 2. Slac ken wheel b olts using a wheel bolt socket wrench, putting socket wrench on as far as it will g o. 3. There a re plastic retainers at the front and rea r of the vehic le underbody for positioning the jack. The loca tion of each retainer is indicated by a ma rk on the bottom ed ge of the vehicle. 4. Set the jack to the necessary height by rotating the ey e of the jack by hand. Position the jack a t the front – or rear – so that the jack head fits in the plastic retainer on the vehicle und erbody. Make sure it is positioned correctly. The jack b ase must be on the ground directly b elow the jacking point. Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and turn crank to raise v ehicle. If this is not the case, carefully lower the vehicle imm ediately and reposition the jack. 5. Unscrew wheel bolts a nd put somewhere where the threads will not be soiled. If the wheel trims are the anti-theft type they will be rem ov ed together with the wheel bolts. 6. C hange the wheel. For notes on the spare wheel – see page 205. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 207. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly , inserting the w heel bolt wrenc h as far as the stop. If wheel trims are anti-theft ty pe, first fit wheel trim and click it into place. Va lve sy mbol on bac k of wheel trim must point tow ards valve on wheel. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts c rosswise, p utting on wheel bolt wrench as far a s possib le. 6 211 10. Align and refit wheel trim or w heel bolt caps 3. Before refitting the wheel cover clean the wheel around the retaining clips. Valv e symbol 3 on back of wheel cover must point towards v alve on wheel. Alloy wheels 3: align a nd refit wheel bolt caps 3. 11. S tow away replaced wheel, tools and wa rning triangle in the luggage com partment. 12. H ave the tightening torque of the wheel bolts on the new wheel checked on the v ehicle using a torque wrench as soon as possible and, if nec essary , c orrected. Tightening torque – see page 268. 13. Replace the faulty ty re on the wheel that wa s removed. 14. Replace tem pora ry spare wheel 3 with a full specifica tion wheel w ithout delay. 212 Electrical sys tem Electronic ignition system s generate very hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal. Fuses There are three fuseboxes in the vehicle: in the pa ssenger com partment on the far left of the dashboard, in the luggage compa rtm ent on the left in the stowage compa rtm ent, and in the engine compa rtm ent front left. It is adv isable to carry a full set of fuses – ava ilab le from any Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer. Store spare fuses at rear of fusebox cover on instrument panel. See nex t page for how to open cov er. Before replacing a fuse, turn off the respective switch and the ignition. A defection fuse (Fig. 12892 J) ca n be recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse should only be installed after the cause of the fault has been rectified . There is a fuse extractor on the rear of the fusebox cover on the instrument panel for cha ng ing fuses – see figure above. O nly fit fuses of the sp ecified current rating. Each fuse has its current rating written on it, in addition the ratings are colour coded . Fuse colour Light brown Brown Red Light blue Y ellow White Light green O range Dark blue Fuse rating 5A 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 60 A 213 No. Cir cuit 10 Control unit Steering column module Rat ing 7.5 A 11 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 12 Battery overload protection 15 A 13 – 14 – 15 Control unit Driver’ s d oor m odule Fuses and the most important circuits they protect Some circuits may be protected by sev eral fuses. Fusebox in passenger compa rtment The fusebox is on the left, on the outside of the instrum ent panel. O pen door. Disengage cover by p ulling firmly and rem ov e. No. C ircuit Spa re fuses, fuse ex tra ctor – see page 213. 214 Rating 1 Rad io 2 Interior fan, heating, air c onditioning sy stem 3 S un roof 20 A 4 – 5 Door module control unit – 7.5 A 6 Brake light 7 Body work module control unit 8 C ontrol unit Front passenger door module 7.5 A 30 A 9 C entral control unit 7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A 30 A – – 30 A 16 – 17 Instruments, informa tion display 18 Control unit Driver’ s d oor m odule 19 – – 20 Yaw sensor (ESP) 21 Telematics 7.5 A 7.5 A 22 Ciga rette lighter 23 Interior fan, air conditioning system electronic air conditioning system 24 – 30 A 15 A 30 A – 30 A 40 A – 25 Heating, air conditioning system 7.5 A 26 Instruments, informa tion display 7.5 A No. C ircuit Fusebox in lugga ge compa rtment The fusebox is loca ted on the left side of the luggag e compa rtm ent, in the stowage compartment. Some circuits may be protected by sev eral fuses. No. Circui t Rating Saloon: press the latch down and open the cover. 1 – 2 – – – Estate: press both latches down and op en the c ov er and interior trim . 3 Electric seat adjustment 4 Heated rear window 40 A 40 A Spa re fuses, fuse ex tra ctor – see page 213. 5 Electric seat adjustment 6 Power windows 40 A 30 A 7 Power windows 8 Sea t heating, rear right 30 A 15 A 9 Horn, anti-theft alarm system 15 A 10 Fuel pump 20 A Rat ing 11 Battery voltage, termina l 30 25 A 12 S eat heating , rear left 13 Towing equipment 15 A 20 A 14 Rear window wiper 15 S eat heating , front left 15 A 15 A 16 S eat heating , front right 17 S eat clim ate control 15 A 7.5 A 18 – 19 Twin Audio, Travel Assistant 20 – – 10 A 21 Anti-theft alarm system 22 Ultrasonic sensor, anti-theft alarm sy stem 23 Glass break age sensor (anti-theft alarm system ) 24 Battery voltage, termina l 30 25 – 5A 5A 26 Travel Assistant 27 S eat occupancy recognition, tyre pressure monitoring system rain sensor, air c onditioning sy stem 28 Parking d istance sensors 25 A 7.5 A 29 – – – 7.5 A 25 A – 7.5 A 215 S om e circuits may b e protec ted by several fuses. No. C ircuit Fusebox in engine compa rtment The fusebox is in the box a t the front left side of the engine compartment. Switch off engine before op ening the fusebox in the eng ine compartment, risk of injury. Top op en, disengage front c ov er and op en from top. 216 Disenga ge the bar at the front of the cover of fusebox and swing it upwards. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see p age 213. Rat ing 1 Eng ine electronic s, transmission electronics 30 A 2 S ta rter 3 Horn 30 A 20 A 4 Air conditioning system, electronic air conditioning system 5 Windsc reen w ash system 10 A 15 A 6 – – No. C ircuit Rat ing 27 – – 28 Tailgate m odule control unit 60 A 29 ABS 40 A 30 Tailgate m odule control unit 60 A 31 Vehicle interior module control unit 60 A 32 ABS 40 A 33 Vehicle interior module control unit 60 A 34 Tailgate m odule control unit 60 A No. Ci rcuit 1) Rat ing No. Circui t Rating 7 Central control unit, TC , ESP 20 A 8 Front headlights 10 A 17 – 18 – – – 9 Power steering, Wash jets 10 A 5A 10 – 11 Wind screen wiper – 30 A 19 Head lig ht ra nge adjustment, Xenon headlight system 20 – 12 Wind screen wiper 30 A 13 Central control unit, TC , ESP 7.5 A 21 – 22 – – – 14 Headlight wash sy stem 15 Engine control unit 1) 30 A 10 A 20 A 16 ABS 7.5 A 23 Aux ilia ry heating 24 Battery voltage, terminal 30 25 Battery voltage, terminal 30 26 – The brake lig hts are o n all the tim e if the fuse is d efective and the ig nition is switched on. 15 A – 35 C ooling fan 1 ) 30 A 40 A 36 C ooling fan 1 ) 37 – 20 A 30 A 40 A – 38 – – 30 A 30 A – 1) Depen ding on eng in e. 217 Bulb replacem ent Headlight aiming Before replacing a bulb , switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. We recommend that hea dlight aiming be carried out by a Va ux hall Authorised Repairer, who will have sp ecial equipment. O nly hold new b ulb at base! Do not touc h the b ulb glass with b are hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass evap orate. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadvertently stained bulbs may b e cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits. Replacem ent bulb m ust be in accordance with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wa tta ge g iv en on bulb b ase. When chang ing lights on the left-ha nd side, remove filler neck from windsc reen wash system bottle to g ain better access: disengage retaining clamp and withdraw filler neck by p ulling upwards. Wash fluid may escape if the bottle is full. Protect the environment. Do not allow wash fluid to seep into the ground or drain into the sewage sy stem. 218 Haloge n headlight system dipped and main beam Headlights w ith separate system s for dipped beam 1 (outer b ulbs) and m ain beam 2 (inner bulbs). Di pped beam 1. O pen bonnet. 2. When replacing bulbs on the left side, rem ove the screenwash bottle filler neck – see p age 218. 4. Rotate left bulb carrier and disengage. 6 3. Remove dipped head light p rotective cover. 219 5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from the reflector. 6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting. Ma in beam 7. I nsert new bulb into bulb m ounting, without touc hing the glass. 1. Open bonnet. 8. I nsert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb mounting engage in the recesses in the reflector. 9. Rotate bulb carrier to right as far as it will go. 10. Place head lig ht protective cover in position and close. 11. When changing b ulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the hea dlight fluid container and click it home. 220 2. When replacing b ulbs on the left side, remove the screenwash bottle filler neck – see page 218. 3. Remov e main beam headlight protective cover. 4. Rotate left bulb carrier a nd disengage. 5. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from the reflector. 6. Detac h bulb from bulb mounting . 7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting, without touching the g lass. 8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the b ulb mounting engage in the recesses in the reflector. 9. Rotate bulb carrier to right as far a s it will go. 10. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in position and close. 11. When changing bulbs on the left-hand sid e, refit the filler neck of the headlight fluid conta iner and click it hom e. 221 Xe non headlight s yste m, dippe d and main beam Headlights w ith separate system s for dipped beam 1 (outer b ulbs) and m ain beam 2 (inner bulbs). Dipp ed beam The xenon headlight dipped beam op erates at very hig h voltage. Do not touch; high v oltag e can be fatal. Have bulb s changed by a workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 222 Main beam 1. O pen bonnet. 2. When replacing bulbs on the left side, rem ove the screenwash bottle filler neck – see p age 218. 3. Remove main beam head lig ht protective cover. 4. Rotate left bulb carrier and disengage. 10. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in position and close. 11. When changing bulbs on the left-hand sid e, refit the filler neck of the headlight fluid conta iner and click it hom e. Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 Xenon head lig ht system for main and dipp ed b eam tog ether w ith curve illumination based on steering angle. 5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from the reflector. 6. Deta ch bulb from bulb m ounting. 7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting , without touching the glass. Xenon headlights operate at very high electric al voltage. Do not touch. Danger to life. The bulbs for dipped beam, ma in beam , park ing lig hts and turn signals should only be replac ed b y a w orkshop. We recom mend a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb mounting engage in the rec esses in the reflector. 9. Rotate bulb carrier to rig ht a s far as it will go. 223 Parking lights 1. Open bonnet. 2. When replacing bulbs on the left sid e, remove the screenwash bottle filler neck – see page 218. 3. Remove m ain beam headlight protec tiv e cov er. 224 4. Remove parking light bulb holder from reflector. 5. Remov e bulb from socket. 6. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight protective ca p in position and close. 8. When changing bulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the headlight fluid container and click it home. 6. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate clockwise and engage in position. 7. When changing bulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the headlight fluid container and click it home. Front fog lights 3 We recommend that you have bulbs changed by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Front turn signal light 1. Open bonnet. 2. When replacing bulbs on the left sid e, remove the screenwash bottle filler neck – see page 218. 4. Push bulb into holder a little, rotate left and remove. 5. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the glass. 3. Rotate bulb holder to left and diseng age. 225 4. Remov e bulb from socket. 5. Insert new b ulb without touching the glass. Fit bulb m ounting into bulb housing . Connect plug . C lose stowage compartment. Turn signal, brake, tail, fog tail and re vers ing lights 2. Deta ch plug connector from bulb mounting . Sal oon 3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer edges of bulb m ounting towards ea ch other and remove bulb m ounting. 1. Open the stowage compartment by pressing the bar down. Bulbs from top to bottom: Turn signal light Tail light / brake light Tail light Fog tail light 1) Reversing light 1) 226 Coun try-sp ecific version : fog ta il light on leftha nd sid e only. The b ulb fitted on the right ha nd sid e can b e used as a sp are. Est ate 1. Open the compa rtm ent on the left or right-hand side by pressing the latch down – see page 205. 2. Hold the bulb housing from the outside, use a wheel nut wrench to loosen the retaining nuts and unscrew them by hand. Rem ov e the bulb housing to the rear. Wheel nut wrench – see vehicle tools, pag e 208. 3. Detach the cable from the bulb housing. 4. Undo the three screws using a screwdriv er and d etach the bulb mounting . 5. Remov e the bulb from the socket. Bulbs in bulb mounting: 1 = Brake / reversing light 2 = Turn signal light 6. Fit a new b ulb without touching the glass. Refit the bulb mounting and screw it into place. Position the light housing in the vehic le body and screw it into place. Close the compartment in the side trim. 6 227 Tailgate lights 1. Use a screwd riv er to prise off the plastic plugs in the tailgate panelling to the right a nd left of the ta ilg ate lock. 2. Use the Torx screwd riv er found with the vehicle tools to remov e the screw from the handle in the inner panelling. 3. Remove the inner pa nelling and clips from the tailgate. 4. Unscrew the m ounting in question: 1 = Tail light 2 = Fog ta il light 3 = Reversing lig ht 5. Remov e bulb from socket. 6. Fit a new b ulb without touching the glass. Refit the m ounting in the ta ilg ate. 7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate using the clips. Tighten the screw in the ha nd le. Refit the pla stic plugs in the openings. Bulb replacem ent should be entrusted to a work shop. We recom mend a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repa irer. 228 Number plate light 1. Insert screwdriver vertically into lig ht insert as shown in figure, press to the sid e and disengage spring. 2. Remove the bulb housing downw ards without pulling on the lead . 4. Rotate bulb holder anti-clockwise and disengage. 3. Raise lug and detach connector from bulb m ounting. 5. Remov e bulb from socket. 6. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert holder in light housing and enga ge by turning clockwise. 8. Insert bulb soc ket in light housing. 9. Insert the bulb housing and lock it in place. 229 Front courte sy light and reading lights 3 Before removal, close the doors so that the light is not liv e. 1. Lever the lens out of the housing recesses. 230 2. Remove bulb from socket. 3. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the glass. 4. Mount lens and eng age in position. Glove compartm ent lighting, luggage compartme nt lighting, and footwell lighting 3 Before removal, c lose the doors or hold the contact switch pressed down so that the light is not live. 1. Prise the light out with a screwd riv er. Re ar courtesy lights 3, re ar reading lights 3 We rec om mend that you have bulbs cha ng ed b y a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instrum ent illumination, Information display illumination 3 We rec om mend that you have bulbs cha ng ed b y a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip and remov e. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Insert lig ht in op ening and eng age in position. 231 If you have a problem the department c oncerned. The majority of areas of concern can be quic kly resolved in this way. Should you wish to pursue the matter further, the Principal of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer should be made aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in cases such as this to write to him to confirm your problem and the solutions that have been offered. In our ex perience the m ost comm on ca use of all comp la ints is the result of misundersta nding or la ck of communication between the customer and the Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer. We sincerely hope you will nev er have cause to c om plain about your vehicle. However, if things do g o wrong, the b est course of action for you to take is to contact your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer’s Service Rec eption Staff and explain the d ifficulty y ou are having. We are confident they will do their utmost to resolve the problem to y our comp lete satisfaction. Sometimes, however, despite the b est of intentions of all c oncerned, misundersta ndings can occur. If your problem has not been resolv ed to your satisfaction, please mak e an app ointment to discuss the matter with the Manager of 232 You can be assured the Authorised Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and correct any errors m ade. After a ll, he has a large investm ent in his business and is proud of his reputation and professionalism and fully realises that satisfied c ustomers are his k ey to success. In the unlikely ev ent that you are still not ha ppy with the answer your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has given, or the action he prop oses to correct the problem, you may conta ct the C ustomer Care Department 1) w here a team of Custom er Care Consultants will spare no effort to ensure your complete satisfa ction. Va uxhall Motors Lt d. Customer Ca re, Griffin House, Osborne Road, LUTO N, Beds., LU1 3YT Telep hone: 01582 427200 1) Calls ma y be mo nito red and recorded fo r tra in in g p urp oses. They w ill review all the facts involved. Then if it is felt some further action can be tak en, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter. If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome, y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an independent third p arty suc h as: Autom obile Association (A. A. ) Fanum House, BASI NGSTO KE, Hants., R G21 2EA Royal Autom obile Cl ub (R.A.C .), R.A. C. M otoring S ervices Ltd., 89-91 Pall Mall, LON DON , SW1Y S 45 The Customer Relations Dep artment, Soc iet y of Mot or Manufact ur ers and Trad ers Ltd. (S .M.M. T.), Forbes House, H alkin Street, LON DON , SW1X 7DS C ustomer Complaints Service, Sc ottish Motor Tra de Associ ation, (S. M.T.A.), 3 Palmerston Place, EDINBURGH, EH 12 5AQ The National Conciliation Serv ice, Retai l Motor I ndust ry Federation, 9 North Street, RUGBY , C V21 2AB I f you hav e a problem w hilst ab road: The Service Departm ents of Adam Op el AG and General M otors branches every where will provid e information and assistance O pel Austria Vertriebs GmbH Groß-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59 1220 Vi enna – Austria Tel. 01-2 88 77 444 or 01-2 88 77 0 O pel Belgium N. V. Prins Boudewijnlaa n 30 2550 Konti ch – Belgium Tel. 03-4 50 63 11 O pel C & S spol. s. r. o. Na Pank ráci 26 140 00 Pra gue 4 – Czech R epub lic Tel. 02-61 21-88 21 General Motors Da nm ark Jaegersborg Alle 4 2920 Charlot tenl und – Denmark Tel. 39 97 85 00 Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Customer C are Griffin H ouse, Osborne Road Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – Eng land Tel. 0 15 82-42 72 00 O pel O y Pajuniity ntie 5 00320 Helsink i – Finland Tel. Helsinki 61 58 81 General Motors France 1 – 9, avenue du Marais Angle Q uai de Bezons 95101 Ar gent euil Cedex – Franc e Tel. 1-34 26 30 00 ADAM O PEL AG Bahnhofsplatz 1 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany Tel. 0 61 42-77 50 00 or 0 61 42-7 70 Opel Hella s S .A. 56 K ifisias Avenue & Delfon str. Am arousion 151 25 Athens – Greece Tel. 1-6 80 65 01 Opel Southeast Europe Ltd . Szabad sag utc a 117 2040 Buda örs – Hungary Tel. 06-23 446 100 General Motors India Sixth Floor, Tow er A Glob al Business Park Mehrauli - Gurgaon Road Gurgaon - 122 022, Ha ryana , India Tel. 0091 124 280 3333 Opel Irela nd Ltd. Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road Sandyford, Dubli n 18 – I rel and Tel. 01-216 10 00 Opel Italia S .p.A. Piaz zale dell'Industria 40 00144 Rome – I taly Tel. 06-5 46 51 For Luxemb ourg – contact Opel Service Department in Kontich – Belgium Opel Nederland B.V. Baanhoekweg 188 3361 GN Sliedrecht – Nether lands Tel. 0 78-6 42 21 00 General Motors Norge AS Kjeller-Vest 6 2027 Kjeller – N or way Tel. 23 50 01 04 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Domaniewsk a 41 06- 672 Wa rsa w – Pola nd Tel. 0 22-606 17 00 O pel Portugal Q uinta da Fonte Ed. Fernão Ma galhã es, Piso 2 Porto Salvo 2780 Oeira s – Por tugal Tel. 01-4 40 75 00 O pel España de Autom óv iles S.A. Paseo de la Castellana, 91 28046 Madrid – Sp ain Tel. 902 25 00 25 S aab O pel Sverig e AB Esboga ta n 8 164 74 Kista – Sw eden Tel. 08-632 85 00 O pel Suisse S.A. S alzhausstra ße 21 2501 Biel/Bienne – S witzerland Tel. 0848 810 820 or 0 32-3 21 51 11 O pel Türkiy e Ltd. S ti. K emalp asa yolu üzeri 35861 Torb ali/Izmir – Turkey Tel. 02 32-8 53-14 53 In Al bania, Bosnia -Her zegovi na , Bulga ria, C roatia , Macedonia , Rom ania, S lovenia and Yugosla via please contact the Opel S ervice Depa rtm ent in Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 233 Maintenance, Inspection system In ord er to guarantee economical and sa fe vehic le operation a nd to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is of vital importance tha t all maintenance work is carried out at the p roper intervals as specified by Vauxhall. The oil c hange and serv ice interv als are flex ible, based on a numb er of different param eters and the conditions under which the v ehicle is used. Various enginespecific da ta is c ontinuously record ed a nd used to ca lc ulate the remaining distance up to the next inspection date. 234 The service interval display takes acc ount of off-the-road periods during which the battery is disconnected. Further information on maintenance and the inspection system can be found in the S ervice Booklet, which is in the glove compa rtm ent. The rem aining driving dista nce can b e seen in the tachom eter disp la y when the ignition is off: Press the reset button und er the trip odometer; v and the remaining driving dista nce will then be display ed. If the remaining dista nce to the next service is less than 1000 miles (1500 km ), v is disp layed with a remaining dista nce of 600 m iles (1000 km ) when the ignition is switched on. v is displayed for several second s if the rem aining d istance is less than 600 miles (1000 km ). Have the service work that is due ca rried out within one week or 300 miles (500 km). Ha ve this work carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in ord er to av oid loss of warranty claims. Hav e maintenance work, as well as repairs to the b od ywork and equipment, carried out by a professional. We recomm end a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in possession of the nec essary sp ecial tools and the latest Service Instructions from Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the warranty p eriod to av oid inv alidation of warranty claims. S ee the Serv ice Booklet for further information. Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce Hav e this carried out every 2 years, either within the scope of a S ervice or separately, see Service Book let. We recomm end that you c onsult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to avoid loss of warranty claims for rust d amage. A note on safety To avoid injury from cables cond ucting ignition voltage, only c arry out engine compartment checks (e. g. checking the brake fluid level or engine oil level) when the ignition is switched off. The cooling fan is controlled by a thermo-switch and can therefore start unexp ectedly even if the ignition is switched off. Risk of injury. Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; hig h voltage can be fatal. N ever carry out any repairs or adjustment and m aintenance work on the vehicle y ourself. This especially applies to the eng ine, chassis and safety parts. You may unwittingly infringe the p rov isions of the law and, by not performing the work properly , endanger y ourself and other road users. Checking and topping up fluids To aid identification, the engine oil filler cap , coolant ex pansion tank ca p, hea dlight 3 and w indscreen wash fluid container ca p and the ha nd le of the oil dipstick a re coloured y ellow. 235 Engine oil The oils listed on pag e 252 are particularly suitab le for this engine. These high-quality oils are suitable for sum mer and winter operation. Com mercially available oils must only be used in the grades a nd viscosities shown on page 252. This may reduce the cha nge interval. In case of doubt, conta ct a workshop. We recommend consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In the case of brand oils the ma nufacturers are responsible for ensuring that the oils they supply are suitable for Vauxhall vehic les. Engine oil l ev el and consumpt ion It is norma l for every engine to consum e some oil. Engine oil consum ption cannot be reliably ascertained until the vehicle has covered a substantial numb er of miles / kilometres. During the running-in phase, it may b e abov e the spec ified lev el. Frequent running at high engine speeds increases oil consumption. The engine oil lev el is check ed autom atic ally – see p age 38. Before emba rk ing on a long journey it is recommended tha t the eng ine oil lev el is checked. C heck ing the engine oil level, top ping up engine oil The figures on this page show the chec ks for various petrol and d iesel engines, Fig. 15175 J on the nex t page shows check s for engine Y 30 DT 1) . The oil level must be checked with the vehicle horizontal and with the engine (which must be at operating tempera ture) switched off. Wait a t least five minutes before checking the level to allow the normal oil acc um ulation in the engine to drain ba ck into the oil pa n. Imp ortant: It is the ow ner’s responsibility to maintain the proper lev el of an appropriate qua lity oil in the engine. 1) 236 Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 257. To check the level, rem ov e the oil gauge (dipstic k), w ipe it clean and reinsert it as far as it will g o. At the very latest, top up if the oil level has dropped to just ab ov e the " add oil" ma rk MIN . The oil level must not go above the upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess oil m ust be drained or extracted b y suction. If the oil lev el does go above the mark MAX there is a risk of d amage to the engine or cataly tic converter. The a mount filled must be between the MIN and MA X marks – see pag e 276. When top ping up, use the sam e oil a s a t the la st oil change, and pa y strict attention to the instructions on pa ge 252. O il chang e, oi l filter cha ng e C ha nge the oil at the displayed serv ice interva ls. Lubricant charts – see p age 253, 254, 255. We recommend that y ou use g enuine Vauxhall oil filters. Capacities – see page 276. The oil consumption will not stabilise until the vehicle has been driven several thousand miles. Only then can the ac tual ra te of consum ption b e estab lished . Used oil filters and empty oil cans do not belong in the domestic garb age. We recommend having oil changes and oil filter changes carried out by a Va ux hall Authorised Repairer. The Vauxhall Authorised Repairer k nows the laws conc erning the disposa l of used oil and therefore protects the env ironment and your health. 237 Diese l fue l filter Coolant Check fuel filter for a ny w ater residue when each engine oil cha ng e tak es place. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. During operation the system is pressurised. The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly to ov er 100 °C. Hav e filter checked at shorter intervals in the c ase of ex treme opera ting conditions suc h a s high humidity (prima rily in coastal areas), extremely high or low outside tem peratures and substantially varying day tim e a nd nig ht-time tem peratures. The glycol-ba sed coolant provides exc ellent corrosion protection for the heating and cooling systems as well as anti-freeze protection down to – 28 °C . It remains in the cooling system throughout the year and need not b e changed. Certain a ntifreezes ca n lead to engine damage. We therefore strongly recommend the use of antifreezes that ha ve b een approved by Vauxhall. Anti-freeze is a da nger to health; it must therefore be kept in the original container and out of the reach of children. Anti -freeze a nd corrosion prot ect ion Before the sta rt of the cold weather season, have the coolant checked for correct concentration. We recommend that you consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer. The amount of a ntifreeze must provide protec tion up to approx.–28 °C . If the antifreeze concentra tion is too low, this reduc es protection from freezing and corrosion. Top up antifreeze if necessary . If c oolant loss is topped up with wa ter, have concentration checked and a dd antifreeze if necessary. 238 Top up anti-freeze. I f no anti-freeze is available, top up w ith c lean tap water. If tap water is unav ailable, distilled water can be used. After topping up w ith tap or distilled water, ha ve the anti-freez e concentration checked, a nd anti-freeze added if necessary. H ave the cause of the coolant loss remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. When closing, tighten coola nt filler cap as fa r as it will go. C oola nt level Hardly any losses occur since the cooling system is sealed and it is thus rarely necessary to top up the c oolant. The c oolant in the compensation tank should b e slightly above the mark KALT / COLD with the cooling system cold. It rises when the engine is warm and fa lls again as it c ools. If it drop s b elow the marking in this case, it should be topped up to a level just abov e the marking. C ool ant temp era ture For physical reasons, the engine temperature gauge shows the coolant temperature only if the coolant level is adequate. During operation the system is pressurised. The tem perature may therefore rise to ov er 100 ° C. If the temp erature g auge enters the righthand (w arning) zone or control indicator W lights up, chec k the c oolant level imm ediately. z Coolant level low: Top up coolant. Pay strict attention to the instructions given under "Anti-freeze and corrosion protection" a nd "Coolant level". Have the cause of coolant loss remedied . We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Coolant level O K: Have the c ause of inc reased coolant temperature remed ied. Contact a workshop. We rec om mend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Allow engine to cool d ow n before removing coola nt filler ca p. Remove filler cap carefully so that p ressure can escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of scalding. 239 Extreme cleanliness is im porta nt, since brake fluid contam ination can lead to brake sy stem malfunctions. After correcting the brake fluid level, have the cause of the loss rem edied. We recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer. Brake fluid Brak e fluid level Caution – brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Do not allow it to come into contact with ey es, sk in, fabric or painted surfaces. Direct contact could cause injury and damage. The fluid level in the reserv oir must b e neither higher than the MAX m ark nor lower than the MIN mark. Use of some brake fluid s could c ause dam age or im pair braking effectiveness. Stay well informed. We recomm end that you only use Vauxhall-approved high performance brake fluid. 240 Brake fluid change Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i. e. it absorbs water. If the brak es become hot, such as when driving on long downhill stretches, vapour bubbles ca n oc cur in the water, whic h can have an ex tremely ad verse effect on brak ing power (depending on the prop ortion of water). The fluid change intervals specified in the Serv ic e Booklet must therefore be ob served. We recommend that you have brak e fluid changed by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will be familiar with the req uirements of the law as regards disposal of brake fluid a nd can thus help to protec t the env ironment and your hea lth. Windscreen wiper C lear v ision is essential for safe driving. Y ou should therefore perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper a nd hea dlight wiper system 3 to m ake sure they are operating correc tly . If the windsc reen is dirty, operate the screenwash b efore switching on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automatic op eration with the rain sensor 3. This will avoid wip er blad e wear. Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or set to a utoma tic operation with the rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as this could da mage the wiper blades or the wiper system. If the wiper bec om es frozen on to the glass, we recomm end that it be released with the aid of Vauxhall De-icer S pray. S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent. Wiper blades whose lips have become hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone must be replac ed. This may be necessary as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning agents. S witc h off the windsc reen w ip er and automatic operation with rain sensor 3 in car washes – see pages 19, 246. To ensure proper operation of the ra in sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash system m ust also be operated at regular intervals and the sensor a rea m ust be deiced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 ca n be identified by the sensor area near the top of the w indscreen. Service set ting for front w indscreen w iper (e.g. for cha nging or cleaning the front wiper b la des). Within 8 seconds of switching off the ignition, press the windscreen wip er stalk downwards. Release the windscreen wip er stalk as soon as the w ip er blad es are vertical. Wiper bl ades on the windscreen Activating serv ice p osition, see preceding column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release lever a nd detac h the wiper blade. 241 The windscreen wash system and headlight wash system w ill not freeze in winter: Frost protection down to Winds creen and headlight wash systems 3 The filler neck for the windscreen w ash reserv oir and the headlight washing system 3 is at the front left of the engine compartment near the battery . The fluid lev el in the reservoir ca n be c hecked using the d ipstick. Do not fill fluid level to more than 1/ 1. Capa city – see p age 276. Fill only with clean w ater to prevent the nozzles from clogging. To improve cleaning efficiency, we recommend that you add a little Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent. 242 a–5 °C Mixture strength Vauxhall Windscreen Wa sh S olv ent: Water 1 :3 –10 °C –20 °C 1 :2 1 :1 –30 °C 2 :1 When closing the container, press the lid firmly over the beaded ed ge a ll the way round. Battery The battery is m aintenance-free. We recom mend that you have battery chang es carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The Vauxhall Authorised Repairer k nows the laws conc erning the disposa l of used batteries a nd therefore protects the environment and your health. Retro-fitted electrical or electronic acc essories can p lace an additional load on the battery or even discha rg e the battery. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding technical possibilities, suc h as fitting a more powerful battery. Laying up the vehicle for more than 4 weeks can lead to ba ttery d ischarge, which may reduce the service life of the battery. Disconnect battery from on-board power supply by detaching negative term inal (anti-theft alarm system 3 is then disabled ). Do not connect battery with ignition switched on. Then perform the following opera tions: z Remove radio b lock 3, see rad io op erating instructions. z Set date and time in information display – see page 44. z Activ ate w indow and sun roof elec tronics 3 – see pages 121, 124. In order to prev ent the b attery from discharging , som e c onsumers suc h as the courtesy light automatically switch off after approx. 20 minutes. Protecting electronic com pone nts In order to prevent faults in electronic components in the electrica l sy stem, nev er connect or disconnect battery with engine running or ignition switched on. Never start engine w ith b attery disconnected, e.g. when starting using jump leads. The battery m ust b e disconnected from the vehicle b efore b eing charged: first disconnect the neg ativ e cable and then the positive cable. The polarity of the battery , i.e. the connections for the positive and neg ative cables, m ust not be interchanged. When reconnecting , first connect the positiv e cab le and then the neg ative cable. To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical system, e. g. connecting ad ditional consum ers or tampering with electronic control units (chip tuning). Electronic ignition system s generate very hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal. 243 Ve hicle decom mis sioning O bserve na tional regulations. If the vehicle is decomm issioned for several months, the follow ing work must be ca rried out in order to prevent damage. We recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see page 246. z Check protective coating in engine com partment a nd on underbody a nd rectify where necessary . z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on bonnet and doors. z Change engine oil – see page 237. z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion protection – see page 238. z Check the coola nt level, top up with antifreeze if nec essary – see pag e 239. z Empty windsc reen w ash system and headlight wash system. z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified for m aximum load – see page 268. 244 Vehicle storag e z Park vehicle in dry, well v entilated plac e. With manual transmission select first gear or reverse gear, and with autom atic transm ission 3 or C VTronic 3 mov e selector lever to P. Prev ent vehicle from rolling using wedges or the like. V ehicle recomm issioning z Do not apply handbrake. z Fill up w indscreen wash system – see page 242. z Disconnect battery by disengaging neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical system – see page 243. O bserve national regulations. Perform the following work before recommissioning the vehicle: z Connect ba ttery – see page 243. z Check tyre pressure – see pa ge 268. z Check engine oil level – see p age 236. z Check the coolant level; top up with antifreez e if necessa ry – see pa ge 239. z If necessa ry , fit the number plates. When fitting the front numb er plate, do not use any number plate reinforcement. Vehicle care Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer with regard to care a id s tested and recommended by Vauxhall. When caring for your vehicle, observe all na tional environm ental reg ulations, particula rly when wa shing it. Regular, thorough care helps to improve the appearance of your vehicle and maintain its v alue over the y ears. It is a lso a prerequisite for warranty claims for any paint or corrosion damag e. The following pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if used properly , will help combat the unav oida ble d amaging effects of the environment. V ehicle care aids 3 Vehicle wash: z Wa sh brush, z Shampoo, z Sponge, z Insect Removal S ponge, z Chamois. Vehicle care: z Paintwork Clea ner, z Paintwork Polish, z Crea m Polish, z Metallic Paintwork Wax , z Hard wa x, z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint, z Vauxhall Touch-Up / Aerosol Paint, z Wheel Preserver, z Tar Rem ov er, z Insect Remover, z Window Cleaner, z Vauxhall Windscreen Wa sh S olv ent, z Silicone O il for Rubber Sea ls, z Cleaner. 245 Washing The paintwork of your v ehicle is exposed to env ironmenta l influences, e. g. continuous changes in weather conditions, ind ustrial waste gases and dust or tha wing sa lts, so wash and wax your v ehicle regularly. When using a utoma tic car washes, select a programme which includes wax ing. Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off immediately , as they contain aggressive constituents which can cause paint dam age. Please follow the wash sy stem manufacturer’s instructions w hen using wash systems. The wind screen wiper and the autom atic wiper w ith rain sensor 3 and the rear window wiper 3 must be switched off – see page 19. Unscrew the antenna rod 3 a nd the roof rack 3, standing on the door sill to make them easier to reach. If y ou w ash y our v ehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wing s a re also thoroughly rinsed out. 246 Clea n edges and folds on op ened doors and flaps as well a s the area s they cover. Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the vehicle. Rinse leather frequently . Use separate leathers for paint and w indow surfaces: remnants of wax on the wind ow s will impair vision. Observ e national regulations. Waxing Wax your vehicle regularly, in pa rticular after it has been washed using shampoo and at the latest when wa ter no longer forms beads on the pa intwork, otherwise the paintwork will d ry out. Also wax edg es a nd folds on op ened doors and flaps as well a s the area s they cover. P olishing Polishing is necessary only if the pa int has become dull or if solid deposits hav e become attached to it. Paintwork polish with silicone forms a protec tiv e film, making w axing unnecessary. Plastic body parts should not be treated with wax and polish. Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles with a metallic-effect paint finish. Whe els Use a pH-neutral w heel c leaning agent to clean the wheels. Wheels a re painted and ca n be treated with the same ag ents as the body. For alloy wheels we recomm end use of Alloy Wheel Preserv er. Paintwork damage Plastic and rubber parts Interior and upholste ry Repair small area s of p aint damage suc h as stone impacts, scratches etc. immediately using a Va ux ha ll touch-up applicator or Vauxhall sp ra y and touch-up paint before rust can form . If rust has alrea dy formed, ha ve the c ause remedied. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also pay attention to surfaces and edg es beneath the v ehicle where rust ma y have formed unnoticed for some time. For add itional cleaning of plastic and rubb er parts use C leaner. Do not use any other agent, and in particular do not use solvents or petrol. C lean the vehicle interior, including the instrument panel fac ia , using interior cleaner. Exterior lights Headlight and other protective lig ht bezels are made of plastic. If they require additional cleaning after the vehicle has been washed, clea n them with C ar Shamp oo. Do not use any ab ra sive or caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, and do not clean them dry. Wheels and tyres Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners on wheels and tyres. C lean fabric upholstery w ith a vacuum cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use cleaner tha t is suitable for both fabrics and vinyl. Do not use cleaning agents suc h as acetone, c arbon tetrachlorid e, paint thinner, paint remover, nail varnish remover, washing pow der or b leach to clean fabrics, carpets, the dashboard or leather trim 3 in the vehicle interior. Benzine is also unsuita ble. Seat belts Alway s k eep seat b elts clean a nd dry. C lean only w ith lukewa rm water or C leaner. 247 Windows Windscre en wiper blades Engine compartme nt When cleaning the heated rear window, mak e sure tha t the heating element on the inside of the wind ow is not d amaged. Smearing wiper blades can be c leaned with a soft c loth and Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary – see p age 240. Area s in the engine compartment painted in the vehicle colour a re cared for like any other pa inted area. It is adv isable to wash and w ax the engine compartment before and a fter winter. Cover the alternator a nd brak e fluid reservoir with plastic sheeting before washing the engine. Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather in conjunction with Wind ow Cleaner and Insect Remover. Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is suitab le for de-icing windows. For mechanical removal of ice, use a commercially a vailable sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the sc ra per firmly against the g lass so that no dirt can get und er it and scratch the glass. Locks The locks are lubricated with a hig h-grad e lock cylinder grease at the fac tory . Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the lock s from freezing up. O nly use de-ic ing agent in emerg encies, a s they have a degreasing effect a nd will impair the function of the locks. After using a de-icing agent, hav e the locks re-greased. We recommend that you entrust this to a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. When washing the engine with a steam -jet cleaner, d o not direct the steam jet at components of the Anti-lock Brak e Sy stem, the a utoma tic air cond itioning system, the auxiliary heating system hea ter or the belt drive and its components. Protective wax that has been applied is also rem ov ed during the engine wash. For this reason, have the engine, brake sy stem components in the engine c om partment, ax le components with steering , body parts and c avities thoroughly preserved with protec tiv e w ax after the wash. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer. An eng ine wash can be performed in the spring in order to remove dirt that has adhered to the engine compartment, which ma y also have a high salt content. C heck protective wax layer and make good if nec essary . Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on wheels and tyres. 248 Underbody Your vehicle has a fa ctory -applied PVC undercoating in the wheel arches (includ ing the longitudinal members) w hich provides permanent protection and needs no special m aintenance. The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not covered b y PVC are provided with a durable protective w ax coating in critical areas. On vehicles which are washed frequently in autom atic car washes with underbody washing facility, the protective wax coating may b e impaired by d irt-dissolv ing additives, so check the underbody after washing and ha ve it waxed if necessary . Before the start of the cold weather season, check the PVC c oa ting a nd protective wax coating and, if necessary , have them restored to perfect condition. C aution – commercially av aila ble bitumen / rubber materials can damag e the PVC coating. We recommend that you have underbody work carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who knows the prescribed materials and has experience in the use thereof. The underbody should be washed following the end of the cold weather season to remov e any dirt adhering to the underbody since this may also contain salt. C heck p rotective wax c oa ting and , if nec essary , have it restored to perfec t condition. 249 Technical data Vehicle docum ents, identification plate The tec hnical d ata is determined in accordance with European C ommunity standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those given in this manual. The identification plate is affix ed to the front right door frame. 250 Information on identification plate: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Manufac turer Type approval number Vehic le Id entific ation N umber Permissible gross v ehicle weight Permissible gross train weight Maximum permissib le front axle load Maximum permissib le rear axle load Vehic le-specific or country-specific da ta In other design v ariants, the identification plate m ay also be affixed to the dashboard. Engine code and engine number: stamp ed on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase. Coolant, brake fluid, oils When topping up – coola nt, – brake fluid, – manual transmission oil, – autom atic transmission oil, – CVTronic transmission oil, – power steering oil We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can adv ise you on the correct products to use. C aution: Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious damage to the vehicle. Ve hicle ide ntification data The Vehicle Identification Numb er is stamped on the identification plate (see previous pag e) and in the vehicle floor on the right-hand side under a cover between the front passenger d oor a nd seat. 251 Eng ine oi ls For more information, see the S ervice Booklet. The oil change intervals for engine oils are flex ible (ECO Serv ic e-Flex). The next eng ine oil change will be displayed on the v ehicle instruments and will depend on how you drive the vehicle. Driving patterns take into account e. g. frequent cold sta rts, short trip s, avera ge driving conditions or p redominantly long distance d riv ing. 252 Your Vectra is deliv ered from the fac tory with engine oil of q uality GM-LL-A-025 (S AE 5W-30) 3 or GM-LL-B-025 (S AE 5W-40) 3. With this eng ine oil, the nex t oil c hange is after a maxim um of 2 y ears or 25,000 miles / 35,000 km (petrol eng ines) or a maximum of 2 y ears or 30,000 miles / 50,000 km (diesel eng ines). The service interval display ta kes into a ccount off-the-road p eriods during which the battery is disconnected – see pag e 234. The engine oil that has been specially developed for vehicles with ECO Serv ice-Flex can be obtained from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer or on the open market (e.g. filling stations). A list of oil companies can be found on the Internet at w ww.vaux hall. co.uk When topping up, alwa ys use engine oil of quality GM -LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025 (see table on the following page), to benefit from the flexible maintenance intervals. If these engine oils a re unavailable – see pag e 254. Maximum oil chang e i nt erv al for oi l grad e GM- LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025 Interva l Engine code Q uality classes Max . 2 years or Z 18 XE, approx. 25,000 miles Z 18 XEL, (35,000 km) Z 20 NET, Z 22 SE, Z 22 YH, Z 32 SE GM -LL-A-025 Max . 2 years or 30,000 miles (50,000 km) GM -LL-B-025 1) Y 20 DTH, Y 22 DTR, Y 30 DT 1 ) I nform ation rega rding oil qualit y GM-LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025 GM = General Motors LL = Long Life A or B = Internal designation 025 = Validity index Higher validity indices indicate progressively more refined c lassifications. O ils w ith higher validity indices can be used. Recomm ended : Shell H elix Plus S (SAE 5W-40), M ob il Synt S (SA E 5W-40), Es so Ultro n (SAE 5W-40). 253 Topping up engine oils of oil gra de ACEA A ma ximum of 1 litre of AC EA quality engine oil can be ad ded before the next oil change without reducing the oil change interval. See a djacent table for quality classes. If more than 1 litre must be added, the oil change interval for petrol and diesel engines is reduced to 1 year or 20,000 miles (30,000 km), see adjoining table. The servic e interval d isplay should then be disregarded. For more information, see the S ervice Booklet. Oil c hange interval s i f top-up q uantity is more than 1 lit re of ACEA qualit y engine oil Interval Engine code Quality classes S AE v iscosity classes 1 year or 20,000 m iles (30,000 km ) Z Z Z Z Z Z ACEA ACEA ACEA ACEA ACEA 0W-30, 0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40, 10W-30, 10W-40 1 year or 20,000 m iles (30,000 km ) Y 20 DTH , Y 22 DTR ACEA B4, ACEA A3/B4, ACEA A3/B3/B4 0W-30, 0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40, 10W-30, 10W-40 1 year or 15,000 m iles (20,000 km ) Y 30 DT 1 ) ACEA B4, ACEA A3/B4, ACEA A3/B3/B4 0W-30, 0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40, 10W-30, 10W-40 1) 254 18 18 20 22 20 32 XE, XEL, NET, SE, YH, SE R ecom mend ed en gine oils – see pa ge 253. A3, A3/B3, A3/B3/B4, A5, A5/B5 Inform ation on AC EA oil grade cla ssific ation The Association d es Constructeurs Européens d’Automobiles classifies engine oils according to their perform anc e (quality). Ea ch class is identified by letters and numbers, e.g. A3. The letter indicates the field of a pplication. A = Petrol eng ines in passenger cars B = Diesel engines in passenger cars E = Diesel engines in trucks The number indicates the quality in ascending numeric al order. Im portant note For countries in which the specified oils (GM-LL-, ACEA A3/B3) are not availab le, more detailed inform ation is found in the Service Booklet. Informat ion on SAE oil vi sc osit y Engine a nd transmission oils are grouped in SAE classes b y the S oc iety of Automotive Engineers b ased on their v iscosity. Viscosity is the measure of interna l friction of the oil in flux , dependent on its temperature. The SAE classification does not provide information on the quality of the oil; it merely indicates the range of application of the oil dependent on the outside temperature – see diagram. I = O nly approved and recommended Long -Life engine oils with the identification GM-LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B -025 – see page 253. I I = O nly if the higher quality I is unavailable may engine oils of AC EA oil quality be used in this case the oil change interval is reduced to 20, 000 miles (30, 000 km) or 1 y ear – see page 254. The first number indicates v iscosity at low temperatures (cold sta rt behaviour). The second num ber indicates visc osity a t hig h temperatures. 255 Engine data Sales designation Eng ine code 1. 8 Z 18 XE 1.8 Z 18 XEL 2.0 Turbo Z 20 NET 2.2 Z 22 S E Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4 Bore dia. (mm ) 80.5 80. 5 86.0 86.0 88.2 88. 2 86.0 94.6 1796 1796 1998 2198 Max . engine outp ut (k W) at rpm 90 6000 81 5600 129 5500 108 5600 Torque (Nm ) at rpm 167 3800 167 3800 265 2500 to 3800 203 4000 10.5 10. 5 9.5 10.0 95 98 91 95 98 91 95 98 91 Stroke (mm) Piston displacement (cm 3) Com pression ratio O ctane requirement unleaded or unleaded or unleaded (RO N) 1 ) 2) 2 )3) 2) 2)3 ) 2) 2 )4) 95 98 91 2) 2 )4 ) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6400 6400 6500 6500 O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0. 6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1) 2) 3) 4) Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228; value p rinted in b old: reco mmend ed fuel. Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber). Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used . If n o u nlea d ed Prem iu m fuel is availab le, 91 RON can be used taking ca re to a void high engine lo ad o r full loa d as well a s for d rivin g in mo untainou s terra in with a caravan / trailer loa d o r hig h pa ylo ad . 256 Engine data Sales designation Eng ine code 2.2 d irect Z 22 YH 3.2 V6 Z 32 SE 2.0 DTI Y 20 DTH 2.2 DTI Y 22 DTR 3.0 C DTI Y 30 DT Numb er of cylinders 4 6 4 4 6 Bore dia. (mm ) 86.0 87.5 84.0 84.0 87.5 94.6 88.0 90.0 98.0 82.0 2198 3175 1995 2172 2958 Max . engine outp ut (k W) at rpm 114 5600 155 6200 74 4000 92 4000 130 4000 Torque (Nm ) at rpm 220 3800 300 4000 230 1500 to 2500 280 1500 to 2750 370 / 330 1 ) 1900 to 2800 / 1600 to 3600 1) Com pression ratio 12.0 10.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 O ctane requirement (RO N) 2 ) unleaded or unleaded or unleaded Cetane requirement (CN) 2 ) 95 3) 98 4 ) –5) 95 98 91 – – – – 49 (D) 7 ) – – – 49 (D) 7 ) – – – 49 (D) 7 ) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) ap prox . 6500 6800 5000 5000 4500 to 4700 O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Stroke (mm) Piston displacement 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) (cm 3) 4) 4 )6) Version w ith a utoma tic trans mission. Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; va lue p rinted in b old: reco mmen ded fuel. The use o f fuel tha t is a t leas t 95 o ctan e is p res crib ed. Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber). 91 octa ne fu el m ust not be used . Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used . A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter fu els. 257 Pe rform ance (approx. mph; k m/h) , Saloon Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XEL Z 20 N ET Z 22 S E Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Sport transmission Automatic transmission CVTronic 126; 203 127; 205 – 118; 190 122; 196 123; 198 – – – 143; 230 – – – 134; 216 131; 210 – Eng ine 1 ) Z 32 SE Y 20 DTH Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT 154; 248 – 153; 246 – 119; 192 – – – 125/128;2023 )/206 – 125; 202 – 140; 226 – 139; 223 – speed2) Max imum Manual tra nsmission Sport transmission Automatic transmission CVTronic 1) 2) 3) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle. Co untry-specific versio n. 258 Pe rform ance ( approx. mph ; km/h ) , Estate Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XEL Z 20 N ET Z 22 YH Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Sport transmission Automatic transmission CVTronic – 124; 199 – 112; 180 – 119; 192 – – – 138; 222 – – – 132; 212 129; 208 – Eng ine 1 ) Z 32 SE Y 20 DTH Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT 149; 239 – 147; 237 – 116; 186 – – – 123/126;1983 )/202 – 124; 199 – 138; 222 – 137; 220 – speed2) Max imum Manual tra nsmission Sport transmission Automatic transmission CVTronic 1) 2) 3) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle. Co untry-specific versio n. 259 Fuel cons umption, CO2 e miss ions Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by 1999/100/EC) has ap plied for the measurement of fuel consumption since 1996. The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving practices: Urban driv ing is rated at approx. 1/ and extra-urb an driving with approx . 3 2/ (urban and extra-urban consum ption). 3 Cold starts and acceleration phases are also tak en into consideration. The specification of CO 2 emission is also a constituent of the directive. The figures given m ust not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consumption of a p artic ular vehicle. The calculation of fuel consumption as spec ified by directive 1999/100/EC takes acc ount of the v ehicle’ s kerbweight, ascertained in accordance with these regula tions. O ptional extras ma y result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2 emission lev els than those quoted. To conv ert l/100km into mp g, divide 282 by number of litres/100km. S aving fuel – see page 160. 260 Fuel cons umption (app rox . l/100 km) , CO2 emis sion (ap prox . g/km) , Saloon Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XEL Z 20 N ET Z 22 SE Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic transm ission / C VTronic urban extra-urban total CO 2 10.4/10.7/– /11. 6 5.5/ 5.8/–/ 6.3/ 7.3/ 7.6/–/ 8.3 175/ 182/– / 199 10.4/10. 7/–/– 5. 5/ 5.8/– /– 7. 3/ 7.6/– /– 175/ 182/–/– –/12.8/–/– –/ 6.6/– /– –/ 8.9/– /– –/ 214/–/– – – – – Eng ine 1 ) Z 32 S E Y 20 DTH Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic transm ission / C VTronic urban extra-urban total CO 2 14.0/–/15.4/– 7.3/– / 7. 5/– 9.8/– /10.4/– 235/–/ 250/– 8.2/–/10.3/– 4.7/–/ 5.4/– 6.0/–/ 7.2/– 162/– / 194/– 9.8/– /10.7/– 5.4/– / 5. 5/– 7.0/– / 7. 4/– 189/–/ 200/– 1) 7. 6/–/–/– 4. 5/–/–/– 5. 6/–/–/– 151/–/–/– /11.5/13. 4/– / 6.3/ 6.6/– / 8.2/ 9.1/– / 197/ 218/– Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. 261 Fuel cons umption (app rox . l/100 km) , CO2 emission (approx. g /km ), Estate Eng ine 1 ) Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic transm ission / C VTronic urban extra-urban total CO 2 Z 18 XE –/11.0/–/11.9 –/ 6. 1/–/ 6.6 –/ 7. 9/–/ 8.6 –/ 190/–/ 206 Z 18 XEL Z 20 NET Z 22 YH –/11.0/–/– –/ 6.1/– /– –/ 7.9/– /– –/ 190/–/– – /13. 1/–/– – / 6.9/–/– – / 9.2/–/– – / 221/–/– – /10. 6/12.1/– – / 6.6/ 6.9/– – / 8.1/ 8.8/– – /194/ 211/– Eng ine 1 ) Z 32 SE Y 20 DTH Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic transm ission / C VTronic urban extra-urban total CO 2 14.3/–/15.6/– 7. 6/–/ 7.7/– 10.1/–/10.6/– 242/–/ 254/– 7.9/– /–/– 4.8/– /–/– 5.9/– /–/– 159/–/– /– 8.5/– /10. 5/– 5.0/– / 5.6/– 6.3/– / 7.4/– 170/–/ 200 /– 10. 1/–/11.0/– 5.7/–/ 5. 8/– 7.3/–/ 7. 7/– 197/–/ 208/– 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. 262 Weights, payload and roof load The p ayload is the difference between the permitted g ross vehicle weight (see identification plate, page 250) and the EC kerbweight. To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data for your vehicle below: z Kerb weight from Ta ble 1, page 264 + ... ..... .... .. kg z Ad ditional w eight of equipment versions from Ta ble 2, p age 266 + ... .... ..... .. k g z Weight of heavy accessories from Ta ble 3, page 267 + ... ..... .... .. kg The total The combined total of front a nd rear ax le loa ds must not exceed the perm issible gross vehicle weight. For exa mple, if the front ax le is bearing its m aximum permissib le load, the rear axle can only bear a load that is eq ua l to the gross vehicle weig ht m inus the front axle load. See the identification plate or v ehicle docum ents for permissib le ax le loads. Roof loa d The permissib le roof load is 75 kg (Estate with roof railing – 100 kg). The roof load is the combined weight of the roof rack and the load . Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km /h). C heck fastening at frequent interva ls and tig hten. For safety reasons and to avoid damage to the roof, we recommend that the use of Vauxhall-approved roof rack systems for y our v ehicle. A Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer w ould be p leased to advise y ou. Driving hints – see page 158. = ... ..... .... .. kg is the EC k erbweight. O ptional equipment and accessories increase the kerbweight, w hich means that the p ayload will also change slig htly. Note the weights given in the vehicle documents. 263 Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerbwe ight 1) , Saloon Model Engi ne2 ) 4-door Manual transm ission Automatic transmission C VTronic 5-door Ma nual transmission Automatic tra nsmission C VTronic Vec tra Z 18 XE 1375 – 1393 1390 – 1425 Z 18 XEL 1375 – – 1390 – – Z 20 N ET 1490 – – 1505 – – Z 22 S E 1435 1465 – 1450 1480 – Z 32 S E 1503 1528 – 1503 1528 – Y 20 DTH 1490 – – 1505 – – Y 22 DTR 1505 1530 – 1503 1528 – Y 30 DT – – – – – – Z 18 XE 1395 – 1413 1410 – 1445 Z 18 XEL 1395 – – 1410 – – Z 20 N ET 1510 – – 1525 – – Z 22 S E 1455 1485 – 1470 1500 – Z 32 S E 1523 1548 – 1523 1548 – Y 20 DTH 1510 – – 1525 – – Y 22 DTR 1525 1550 – 1523 1548 – Y 30 DT 1613 1638 – 1650 1675 – Vec tra w ith air conditioning or electronic air conditioning system 1) 2) According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0 % fu ll). Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. 264 Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerbwe ight 1) , Estate Model Engi ne2 ) Estate M anual transmission Automatic transm ission C VTronic Vec tra Z 18 XE 1470 – 1505 Z 18 XEL 1470 – – Z 20 N ET 1565 – – Z 22 Y H 1530 1560 – Z 32 S E 1605 1613 – Y 20 DTH 1580 – – Y 22 DTR 1600 1613 – Y 30 DT – – – Z 18 XE 1490 – 1525 Z 18 XEL 1490 – – Z 20 N ET 1585 – – Z 22 Y H 1550 1580 – Z 32 S E 1625 1633 – Y 20 DTH 1600 – – Y 22 DTR 1620 1633 – Y 30 DT 1705 1730 – Vec tra w ith air conditioning or electronic air conditioning system 1) 2) According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0 % fu ll). Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. 265 Weights (kg) : Table 2, Additional weight of e quipme nt versions Sal oon Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XEL Z 20 N ET Z 22 S E Z 32 S E Y 20 DTH Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT LS / Club / Expression 21 11 11 11 21 21 11 Elegance 42 32 32 32 42 42 32 Elite 49 39 39 39 49 49 39 SRi / GS i / SXi 31 21 21 21 31 31 21 Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XEL Z 20 N ET Z 22 YH Z 32 S E Y 20 DTH Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT LS / Club / Expression 16 7 7 7 7 7 7 Elegance 41 32 32 32 32 32 32 Elite 48 39 39 39 39 39 39 SRi / GS i / SXi 31 22 22 22 22 22 22 Est ate 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. 266 Weights (kg) : Table 3, He avy accessories Sal oon Accessories Sun roof Towing equip ment Weight 17 22 Accessories Sun roof Towing equip ment Weight 17 33 Est ate 267 Tyres Restricti ons Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market currently meet the structural requirem ents. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning suitab le tyre mak es. These ty res have und ergone special tests to establish their reliab ility , safety and specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles. Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we are unab le to assess these attributes for other tyres, even if they hav e been g ra nted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form. Further information – see pa ge 184. Winter tyre s Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 or 235/35 R 19 may not be used as winter tyres (M+ S tyres). O nly the winter tyres sp ecified on p age 274 may b e used on vehicles factory-fitted with tyre eq uipm ent 235/35 R 19. If you use winter ty res 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summ er tyre. If you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling may be a ltered. Ob tain a repla cement for the faulty tyre as soon a s p ossible, and ha ve the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Further inform ation – see page 187. Tyre chains Restri ctions Ty re c hains may be used on the front wheels only. Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no more than 15 m m to the ty re tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). Snow chains are not permitted on the temporary spare wheel 3 115/70 R 16 and tyre sizes 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and 235/35 R 19. Whe els Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spa re wheel m ay have a steel rim. The spare wheel ma y have a smaller tyre and a sm aller rim: using the sp are wheel ma y cause d ifferent driving behaviour. Replace d efectiv e tyre as soon as possible, bala nce wheel and hav e it fitted to the vehicle. Tyre inflation pressure s in bar 1) The specified ty re pressures are valid for cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not be red uced. The specified pressures apply to both summer and winter ty res. Further information – see pa ges 184 to 187. Further inform ation – see page 187. 1) 268 1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa . (ctd.) Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) / ps i Saloon Front Rear Front Rear 2.0/29 2.2/32 2.2/32 2. 7/39 Ty res Z 18 XE, Z 18 XEL 195/65 205/55 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 Z 20 N ET 205/55 R 16 (M+ S) 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.4/35 2. 9/42 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.3/33 2. 8/41 T 115/70 R 16 (temporary spare) 3) 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4. 2/61 all 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa . Tyre infla tion pressure with full load Engine2 ) Z 22 S E 1) Ty re inflation pressure with up to 3 p ersons R 15, R 16, R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207. 269 (ctd.) Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) / ps i Saloon Engine2 ) Z 32 S E all 1) 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa . 270 2) 3) 4) 5) Ty res Ty re inflation pressure with up to 3 p ersons Tyre infla tion pressure with full load Front Rear Front Rear 16 4 ) 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/50 R 17 4 ), 225/45 R 17 4 ), 225/45 R 18 4 ) 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.7/39 3. 2/46 215/55 R 16 5 ) 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.6/38 3. 1/45 215/50 R 17 5 ), 225/45 R 17 5 ), 225/45 R 18 5 ) 2.7/39 2.4/35 2.8/41 3. 3/48 T 115/70 R 16 (temporary spare) 3) 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4. 2/61 215/55 R Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207. Versio n with ma nua l tra nsm is sio n. Versio n with au tom atic tra nsm iss io n. (ctd.) Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) / ps i Saloon Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Y 20 DTH, Y 22 DTR 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.3/33 2. 8/41 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.7/39 3. 2/46 225/45 R 17 2.7/39 2.4/35 2.8/41 3. 3/48 T 115/70 R 16 (temporary spare) 3) 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4. 2/61 all 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa . Tyre infla tion pressure with full load Engine2 ) Y 30 DT 1) Ty re inflation pressure with up to 3 p ersons 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207. 271 (ctd.) Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) Estat e 272 Front Rear Front Rear 2.0/29 2.2/32 2.2/32 2. 7/39 Ty res Z 18 XE, Z 18 XEL 195/65 205/55 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 Z 20 N ET 205/55 R 16 (M+ S) 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.4/35 2. 9/42 195/65 R 15(M+S ), 205/55 R 16 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.3/33 2. 8/41 T 115/70 R 16 (temporary spare) 3) 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4. 2/61 all 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa . Tyre infla tion pressure with full load Engine2 ) Z 22 Y H 1) Ty re inflation pressure with up to 3 p ersons R 15, R 16, R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207. (ctd.) Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) Estat e Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Z 32 S E 215/55 R 16 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.6/38 3. 1/45 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 2.7/39 3. 2/46 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.5/36 3. 0/44 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.3/33 2. 8/41 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.7/39 3. 2/46 225/45 R 17 2.7/39 2.4/35 2.8/41 3. 3/48 T 115/70 R 16 (temporary spare) 3) 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4. 2/61 Y 30 DT all 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa . Tyre infla tion pressure with full load Engine2 ) Y 20 DTH, Y 22 DTR 1) Ty re inflation pressure with up to 3 p ersons 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207. 273 (ctd.) Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) Saloon, Estate with 19-inch wheels Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 Z 18 Z 20 Z 22 Z 22 Y 20 Y 22 235/35 R 19 2.6/38 2.3/33 2.8/41 3. 3/48 215/55 R 16 (M+ S), 225/45 R 17 (M+ S) 2.3/33 2.3/33 2.5/36 3. 0/44 235/35 R 19 3.0/44 2.7/39 3.2/46 3. 5/51 215/55 R 16 (M+ S), 225/45 R 17 (M+ S) 2.6/38 2.6/38 2.7/39 3. 2/46 T 115/70 R 16 (temporary spare) 3) 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4. 2/61 all 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa . 274 Tyre infla tion pressure with full load Engine2 ) XE, XEL, N ET, S E, Y H, DTH, DTR Z 32 S E 1) Ty re inflation pressure with up to 3 p ersons 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207. Electrical system Battery Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 55 Ah / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3 Battery for rad io frequency remote control of central locking system CR 20 32 Battery for remote control of auxiliary hea ter / ventilation AAA LR 06 275 Capacities (app rox . in litres) Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XEL Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 32 SE Y 20 DTH, Y 22 DTR Y 30 DT 7.4 7.7 8.2 7.1 7.4 7.9 7. 1 7. 4 7. 9 7.4 7.7 8.2 7.3 7.6 8.2 – 8.3 8.9 5.5 5.5 7.9 7.9 7.6 7.6 7. 6 7. 6 7.9 7.9 7.8 7.8 – 8.3 6.0 8.4 8.1 8. 1 8.4 8.4 8.9 Fuel tank (nominal capa city ) Saloon Estate 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick 4.25 1.0 6.0 1.0 5.0 1.0 5. 0 1. 0 4.75 1.0 5.5 1.0 7.25 1.3 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2. 9 5. 6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 Cooling system for v ehicles with manual transmission without air con. system 5.5 with air con. system 5.5 with a ir con. sy stem and aux iliary heating 6.0 Cooling system for v ehicles with automatic transmission or CVTronic without air conditioning sy stem with air cond itioning system with air cond itioning system and aux iliary heating Fluid container for wind screen wash system 2.9 with headlight wash system 5.6 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257. 276 Dimensions (approx. in mm) Saloon Estate O verall length 4596 4822 Width 1798 1798 Width with two ex terior mirrors 2036 2036 O verall height 1460 1500 Wheelb ase 2700 2830 11.50 11.50 Turning c ircle 1) diam eter 1 ) In metres. 277 Mounting dim ens ions of towing e quipme nt with re movable coupling ball bar, Ve rsion with turn knob 3 All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent. Dimension mm A 334 B 1061 C 1) 514.5 D 1) 480.5 E 1) 50 F 492.5 G 486.5 H 218 I 495 J 492.5 K 201 We recom mend hav ing towing equip ment retro-fitted by a Vauxhall Authorised R epairer. 1) The atta ch ment p oint is not a va ila ble on all va rian ts. 278 Mounting dim ens ions of towing equipment with rem ovable coupling ball bar, version with levers 3 All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent. Dimension mm A 334 B 1061 C 1) 514.5 1) 480.5 1) 50 D E F 492.5 G 486.5 H 218 I 495 J 492.5 K 201 We recom mend hav ing towing equip ment retro-fitted by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 1) The atta ch ment p oint is not a va ila ble on all va rian ts. 279 Mounting dim ens ions of towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent. Dimension mm A 396.5 B 157.5 C 386 D 74 E 630 F 590 G 491 H 486 I 480 J 379.5 We recom mend hav ing towing equipment retro-fitted by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 280 281 Index 282 A AB S (Anti-lock Brake System ) ........... 182 Ac cessories ............. 110, 115, 204, 205 Ac cessory socket ....................... 74 , 89 Ad aptive Forward Lighting ............. 118 Bulb replacem ent ...................... 223 Driving abroad ......................... 119 Air conditioning system .................. 126 Air intak e ................................... 142 Air outlet .................................... 142 Air qua lity sensor ......................... 135 Air recirculation system ........... 128, 138 Air vents .................................... 129 Airba gs ..................................... 100 Ala rm ......................................... 65 Ala rm system ................................ 63 Alterna tor .................................... 34 Anti-corrosion service .................... 235 Anti-freeze ................................. 238 Anti-freeze protection ............. 238, 242 Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ............... 162 O ctane number ................. 256, 257 Anti-theft alarm sy stem ................... 63 Anti-theft locking system .................. 58 Towing equip ment ..................... 193 Anti-theft protection ....................... 24 Aq ua planing ............................... 186 Arm rest ....................................... 71 Ashtray ................................ 90, 119 Automatic air recirculation mode ...... 138 Automatic anti-da zzle interior mirror . 114 Automatic transm ission ............. 22 , 144 Automatic mode ........................ 144 Driv ing programme .................... 146 Fault ...................................... 148 Interruption of p ow er supply ......... 149 Kickd ow n ................................. 147 Manual mode ........................... 145 Selector lev er ................ 22 , 144 , 145 Selector lev er lock ...................... 145 Winter programme ..................... 147 Automatic wiping .......................... 19 Auxiliary heating .......................... 140 Program ming ........................... 140 Remote control .......................... 141 B Battery ........................ 159 , 242 , 275 Interruption of power supply ......... 60 , 121 , 149 , 157 Before starting off .......................... 23 Belt tensioners .............................. 96 Bleeding, diesel fuel sy stem ............. 199 Bonnet ........................................ 68 Brake system ................................ 34 Brakes ....................................... 180 ABS ........................................ 182 Brake fluid ............................... 240 Brake lights .............................. 226 Brake servo unit ......................... 158 Foot brak e ............................... 180 Handbrake .............................. 181 Bulb replacem ent ......................... 218 Bulbs .................................. 115 , 218 C Ca pacities ................................. 276 Ca ra van / trailer towing ........... 158 , 188 Ca r Pass ........................................ 4 Ca re ......................................... 245 Ca ta lytic converter .......... 164 , 167 , 199 Central locking system .................... 58 Centre console lighting .................. 118 Changing the battery Remote control .............. 57, 142 , 275 Changing ty re / wheel type ............. 184 Changing wheels ......................... 208 Check control........................... 30, 46 Child restraint systems ............ 110 , 115 Child safety locks .................... 54 , 121 Ciga rette lig hter ..................... 89 , 119 Clim ate control............................ 126 Clutch operation .......................... 159 CO 2 emissions ............................. 260 Code numbers ................................ 4 Cold start .................................. 159 Colour inform ation d isplay ............... 41 Control indicator ABS (Anti-lock Brake System ) ....... 183 Airbag ................................... 105 Bra ke pad wear ........................ 180 Cruise control ........................... 172 Engine electronics ..................... 166 ESP (Electronic Stab ility Prog ra mme) ... 170 Exhaust .................................. 166 Immobiliser ............................... 55 Park ing distance sensors ............. 175 TC (Traction C ontrol system) ........ 169 Tyre pressure control sy stem ........ 176 Control indica tors ...................... 12 , 33 Belt tensioners ............................ 96 Brake system ............................ 181 Cool box ...................................... 75 Coolant ..................................... 238 Coolant level ............................... 239 Coolant temp erature d isplay ............. 40 Coolant thermometer ...................... 40 Cooling ...................................... 132 Correcting time .............................. 45 Coupling sock et load ..................... 196 Courtesy light .............................. 118 Courtesy light delay ...................... 118 Courtesy lights Bulb replacem ent ...................... 230 Cruise control .............................. 172 Curtain airbags ........................... 103 Curve lighting ......................... 28, 118 CVTronic .................................... 150 Automatic mode in stages ........... 150 C ontinuously v ariable automatic m od e ....................... 150 Driving programm es .................. 154 Fault ...................................... 156 Interruption of power supply ......... 157 K ic kdown ................................ 155 Manual mode ........................... 150 Selector lever loc k ...................... 151 Winter programm e .................... 155 D Data .................................... 55 , 250 Date ..................................... 44 , 45 Day tim e running lights ................... 116 Decommissioning ......................... 244 Demisting a nd Defrosting with the air conditioning sy stem ..... 133 Demisting a nd defrosting Windows ................................. 132 with the electronic air conditioning system ................ 137 Diesel fuel filter ............................ 238 Diesel fuel system .................. 199 , 238 Dimensions ................................. 277 Dipped beam ......................... 16 , 116 Bulb replacement ................ 219 , 222 Display ..................... 37 , 41 , 146 , 153 Door locks ............................. 54 , 248 Doors ......................................... 38 Door-to-d oor lighting ...................... 17 Drink holders ................................ 92 Driver’s seat with climate control .. 26 , 130 Driving ab road ..................... 162 , 233 Head lig hts ............................... 119 Toll system ................................ 52 Driving hints ................................ 158 283 E Ec onomical driving ................. 158 , 160 Electric seat a djustment ................... 79 Electric sun roof ........................... 123 Electric windows .......................... 120 Electrical system ............. 212 , 243 , 275 Electro-hy draulic power assisted steering ...... 13, 37 , 158 Electro-hy draulic power-assisted steering fluid ......... 251 Electronic air conditioning system ..... 134 Electronic components .................. 243 Electronic immobiliser ..................... 55 Electronic Stability Programm e ........ 170 Engine code .................. 251 , 256 , 257 Engine control indicator ................. 166 Engine oil............................. 236 , 252 Engine oil change ........................ 237 Engine oil consumption ................. 236 Engine oil filter ............................ 237 Engine oil level ....................... 38 , 236 Engine sp eed .............................. 159 Engine wash ............................... 248 Env ironmenta l protection .. 236 , 237 , 245 ES P (Electronic S tability Programme) . 170 Ex haust control indicator ............... 166 Ex haust ga ses ............................. 167 Ex haust system ........................... 167 Ex terior mirrors .................. 8 , 114 , 128 284 F Fan ............................. 127, 235, 236 Filling station C apacities ............................... 276 Engine oil lev el .......................... 236 Fuel .......................... 162, 256, 257 Ignition key ................................. 4 O pening the bonnet ..................... 68 Tyre infla tion pressure ......... 161, 268 Vehicle data ............................ 251 Windscreen wa sh system ............. 242 First-a id kit, ................... 115, 204, 205 FlexOrga nizer ............................... 86 Fluid container, windsc reen w ash system ............... 242 Fog tail lig ht Bulb replacem ent ...................... 226 Fog tail lig hts .............................. 116 Foot brake ................................. 180 Front fog lights ............................ 116 Bulb replacem ent ...................... 225 Front passenger a irba g ................. 100 Fuel ...................... 162, 163, 256, 257 Fuel consumption ............ 160, 162, 259 Fuel filter ................................... 238 Fuel gauge ................................... 40 Fuel level ..................................... 40 Fuel sy stem, diesel ........................ 199 Fuses ........................................ 212 G Genuine Vaux hall Parts a nd Accessories ........................... 25 Glove compartment ....................... 91 Glove compartment lighting ............ 119 Bulb replacement ....................... 230 Graphical information disp lay ........... 41 Gross Vehicle Weight ..................... 263 H Halogen headlight system .............. 219 Bulb replacement ...................... 219 Driv ing abroad ......................... 119 Handbrak e ........................... 24 , 181 Haza rd warning lights ..................... 18 Head restraints .................... 7 , 31, 70 Headlight flash ............................. 16 Headlight range adjustm ent .......... 117 , 179 , 218 Headlight sw itc h ..................... 16 , 116 Headlight wash sy stem ............ 19 , 242 Headlights ................................... 16 Da ytime running lights ............... 116 Driv ing abroad ......................... 119 Fog lights ................................ 116 Reversing lights ........................ 118 Warning device .......................... 24 Heated exterior mirrors ............ 20 , 128 Heated front seats ....................... 130 Heated rear seats ........................ 130 Heated rear window ................ 20 , 128 Heating ............................... 126 , 131 Seats ..................................... 130 with the air conditioning system .... 133 with the electronic air cond itioning system ............... 136 Height adjustment Seat belt ................................... 98 Seats ......................................... 6 Steering wheel.............................. 9 Horn ........................................... 18 I Identification plate ....................... 250 If you have a problem ................... 232 Ignition switch ...................... 9 , 23 , 55 Ignition system ............... 235, 242, 243 Immobiliser ................................... 55 Information display ......................... 41 Infotainment sy stem ....................... 52 Inspection sy stem ......................... 234 Instrument illumination .................. 117 Bulb replacem ent ...................... 231 Instrument p anel ............................ 10 Instruments ............................. 33 , 39 Interior mirror ................................. 8 Universal remote control ............... 66 Interruption of power sup ply . 47 , 51, 121 Electric windows ........................ 121 Selector lever loc k ............... 149, 157 J Jack .......................................... 208 Jump leads ................................. 200 K Key Ignition lock ...................... 9 , 23 , 55 Locking doors ............................. 58 Remove .................................... 24 Starting the engine ............. 9 , 23 , 55 Key numbers, ................................. 4 Keys ........................................... 54 L Language selection ........................ 43 Lashing eyes ................................ 86 Leather trim ................................ 247 Light sw itch .................................. 16 Lighting ................................ 16 , 116 Driv ing abroad .......................... 119 Loading .............................. 195 , 263 Locking doors ............................ 4 , 58 Locking from the inside ................... 59 Locks ........................................ 248 Lubricants .................... 236 , 251 , 252 Luggage compartment Bulb replacement ....................... 230 Extension .................................. 82 FlexO rg aniz er ............................ 86 Lashing ey es ............................. 86 Lighting .................................. 119 Loading ........................... 195 , 263 Locking .................................... 61 Opening ................................... 62 Safety net ................................. 84 Luggage compartment cover ....... 83 , 84 Lumbar support ......................... 6 , 80 285 M M+S tyres ...................... 187 , 266 , 268 Main beam ........................... 16 , 116 Bulb replacement ................ 220 , 222 Control indicator ......................... 35 Maintenance ......................... 25 , 234 Air c onditioning sy stem .............. 143 Anti-freeze protection ................ 238 Bra ke fluid .............................. 240 Bra kes ................................... 180 Catalytic conv erter .................... 167 Engine oil .......................... 236 , 237 Fuel consumption ...................... 161 Ty re pressure ........................... 184 Ty res ............................... 185 , 186 Windscreen wiper ...................... 240 Mirrors ................................... 8 , 114 Misted w indows ......... 20, 132 , 133 , 137 Mobile telephone ........................... 53 N Numb er plate lights Bulb replacement ...................... 229 Numb er plate lighting ................... 229 Numb er plates ............................ 244 286 O Octane num bers ............. 162, 256, 257 Odometer .................................... 39 Oil change ................................. 237 Oil consum ption ........................... 236 Oil filter c ha nge ........................... 237 Oil level ..................................... 236 Oil pressure .................................. 33 Oil quality .................................. 253 Oil v iscosity ................................ 255 Oils .................................... 236, 252 Operating temp erature .................. 159 Outsid e tempera ture gauge .............. 46 Overrun .............................. 159, 161 P Pa intwork damage ....................... 247 Pa rk ing distance sensors ................ 174 Pa rk ing ................................. 24, 174 Pa rk ing lights ........................... 16 , 17 Bulb replacem ent ...................... 224 Pa rk ing the vehicle ......................... 24 Pa rts .................................... 25, 115 Pedals ....................................... 159 Perform ance ............................... 259 Petrol ........................... 162, 256, 257 Pinking ...................................... 162 Pollen filter ................................. 143 Position mem ory ................... 8 , 56 , 80 Preheating ................................... 35 Pushing, towing ........................... 199 R Rad io .................................... 30 , 52 Rad io equipment (CB) ..................... 53 Rad io frequecy remote control Aux ilia ry heating ....................... 141 Central lock ing sy stem ................. 56 Univ ersal rem ote control ............... 66 Rain sensor ..................... 19 , 240 , 246 Reading lights ....................... 118 , 119 Rear light cluster .......................... 116 Bulb replacement ....................... 226 Rear window wash system ... 20 , 242 , 246 Refuelling ................................... 163 Fuel filler cap ............................ 163 Relays ....................................... 212 Remote control Aux ilia ry heating ....................... 141 Central lock ing sy stem ................. 56 Steering wheel ........................... 30 Univ ersal rem ote control ............... 66 Replacement keys .......................... 54 Reversing lights ............................ 118 Bulb replacement ....................... 226 Roof load ................ 88 , 158 , 161 , 263 Roof racks .................... 161 , 188 , 263 Running-in .................................. 158 Brakes .................................... 180 S Safeguard against unauthorised use ................... 4 , 9, 24 Safety ......................................... 94 Safety acc essories ..... 110 , 115 , 204 , 205 Safety net .................................... 84 Safety systems .............................. 94 Sav ing energ y ............................. 160 Seat adjustment ........................ 5, 79 Seat belts ........................ 95, 98 , 247 Seat occupancy recognition ............ 105 Seats ........................................ 5 , 6 Extending the luggage compa rtm ent 82 heated ................................... 130 with clim ate control .............. 26 , 130 Selector lever ........................ 144 , 151 Selector lever lock ...... 22, 144 , 145 , 151 Interrup tion of power sup ply .. 149 , 157 Self-diagnosis .................. 97, 105 , 183 Self-help .................................... 199 Automatic transmission .............. 149 CVTronic ................................ 157 Elec tric sun roof ........................ 124 Elec tric wind ow s ....................... 121 Information display ..................... 44 Radio frequecy remote control ....... 57 Service Booklet .............................. 25 Service interval display ............. 32 , 234 Service work .......................... 25 , 234 Side airbags ............................... 102 Signal system ................................ 16 Spa re keys ................................... 54 Spa re wheel .................. 205 , 206 , 208 Speed ................................ 160, 161 Fuel consum ption ............... 160, 161 Speedometer ................................ 39 Starter switch ................................. 9 Starting the engine ......... 9 , 23 , 55, 199 Self-help ................................. 199 Steering colum n lock ................... 9 , 24 Steering wheel adjustm ent ................. 9 Steering wheel rem ote control ............ 30 Stowage compartments .............. 71 , 91 Sun blind ................................... 125 Sun roof ..................................... 123 Sun shade ........................... 124, 125 System setting s .............................. 42 T Ta bles, ................................... 27 , 76 Ta chom eter .................................. 39 Ta il lights ................................... 116 Bulb replacem ent ...................... 226 Ta ilg ate ....................................... 61 Ta nk Fuel gauge ................................ 40 Technical data ............................ 250 Temperature regula tion .......... 127, 136 Temporary spa re wheel .......... 187, 207 The first 600 miles (1000 km) ........... 158 Thigh support ............................... 80 Tig htening torque ................. 212, 268 Tim e ...................................... 44 , 45 Toll system s .................................. 52 Tools ........................................ 208 Towing ...................................... 202 Towing equipment ........................ 189 Towing eye .......................... 202 , 203 Traction Control sy stem .................. 168 Transm ission, automatic ............ 22 , 144 Automatic mode ........................ 144 Driv ing programme .................... 146 Fault ...................................... 148 Interruption of p ow er supply ......... 149 Kickd ow n ................................. 147 Selector lev er ..................... 144 , 145 Selector lev er lock ...................... 145 Winter programme ..................... 147 Transm ission, CVTronic .................. 150 Travel Assistant ........................ 27 , 72 Trea d depth ................................ 186 Trip comp uter .......................... 29 , 48 Trip odometer ............................... 39 Triple information display ................ 41 Turn lighting ........................... 28 , 118 Turn signal lig hts ........................... 17 Turn signals Bulb replacement ................ 225 , 226 Twin Audio .................................. 30 Tyre chains .......................... 187 , 268 Tyre condition .............................. 185 Tyre infla tion pressure ...... 176 , 184 , 268 Tyre pressure control sy stem ............ 176 287 U Units of m easure ........................... 43 Unlead ed fuel .......... 162 , 164 , 256 , 257 Used oil ............................... 236 , 237 V Vehicle care ............................... Vehicle decomm issioning ............... Vehicle Identification Number ......... Vehicle recommissioning ................ Ventilation .................... 126 , 131 , 288 245 244 251 244 138 W Warning buzzers ............................ 24 Warning messages ......................... 42 Warning triangle, ............ 115, 204, 205 Weights ..................................... 263 Wheels ...................................... 184 Wheels, tyres ............................... 184 Windows Demisting and d efrosting ........ 20, 132, 133, 137 Windscreen wash sy stem .................. 19 Anti-freeze protec tion ................. 242 C apacities ............................... 276 Fluid conta iner ......................... 242 Windscreen wiper .................... 19, 240 Winter op eration Battery ................................... 159 C oolant, a nti-freeze ................... 238 Engine oil ................................ 255 Fuel consum ption ...................... 161 Fuel for diesel engines ................ 163 Heating ........................... 126, 133 Locks ..................................... 248 Tyre chains ....................... 187, 268 Window demisting and d efrosting ................... 132, 133 Windscreen wa sh system, anti-freeze p rotection ................. 242 Winter tyres ......................... 187, 268 X Xenon head lig ht system ................. 222 Bulb replacement ....................... 222 Driv ing abroad .......................... 119